MC9000-G
Product Reference Guide
®
with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs
MC9000-G with Windows® Mobile 2003 Software
for Pocket PCs
Product Reference Guide
72-65703-01
Revision A
October 2003
© 2003 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means,
without permission in writing from Symbol. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to
change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is
on a licensed basis. Symbol grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each
software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may
not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol. No
right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The
user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program
material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without
written permission from Symbol. The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed
programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part.
The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to
the user or any portion thereof.
Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.
Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any
product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies,
Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems
contained in Symbol products.
Symbol, Spectrum One, and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other product
names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies
and are hereby acknowledged.
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
Contents
About This Guide
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix
Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Related Documents and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Service Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Chapter 1. Getting Started
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3
Unpacking the Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Installing and Removing the Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Installing the Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
®
iv
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Charging the Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Charging Spare Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Strap Lanyard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Starting the Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Calibrating the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Setting Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Checking Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Configuring the Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Keypads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
43-Key Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
53-Key Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3270 Emulator Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
5250 Emulator Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
VT Emulator Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Keypad Special Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Using the Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Using a Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Speaker Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Battery Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Connectivity Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Time Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Instant Message Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
E-Mail Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Multiple Notification Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Selecting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Using Pop-up Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Contents
v
Using the Soft Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Using the Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Using the Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Writing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Converting Writing to Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Writing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Selecting Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Selecting Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Drawing on the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Selecting a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Recording a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Using My Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Entering Information Using Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Finding Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Data Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Laser Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Aiming the Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Operational Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Scanning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Scanning Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Scanning Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Scan LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Resetting the Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Performing a Warm Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Performing a Cold Boot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Chapter 3. Settings
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 5
Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Personal Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
®
vi
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Program Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Word Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Sounds & Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Today. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Copyrights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Root. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Contents
vii
Contrast (Monochrome Devices Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Storage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Running Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Optimizing Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Remove Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Wakeups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Wireless Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3
Installing Communication Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Installing ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Setting up a Partnership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Serial Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Ethernet Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Installing eConnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Cradle Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
®
viii
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Chapter 5. Spectrum24 Configuration
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
Mobile Companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Finding WLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Setting Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Changing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Editing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Creating a New Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Ordering Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Sample Spectrum24DS .Reg File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Chapter 6. AirBEAM Smart
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3
AirBEAM Package Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
AirBEAM License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Packages(1) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Packages(2) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Server Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Misc(1) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Misc(2) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Misc(3) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Synchronizing with the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Manual Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
AirBEAM Staging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Chapter 7. Applications
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Contents
ix
Creating Meeting Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Using the Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Using the Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Synchronizing E-mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Using the Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Creating E-mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Typing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Writing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Tips for Working in Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
MSN® Messenger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Setting Up An Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Working with Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Chatting with Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Microsoft Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Getting Books on the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Using the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Reading a Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Using Reader Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Removing a Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Mobile Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Favorite Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
®
x
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Using AvantGo Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Using Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Browsing the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Copy Pictures to the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Edit Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Send Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Set Picture as Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
View Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
View Slideshow of Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Cradles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Snap-on Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Keypads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Replacing the Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Four Slot Charge Only Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Magnetic Stripe Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Attaching and Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Contents
xi
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Serial/USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Using the MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Cable Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Attaching and Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Serial/USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Universal Battery Charger (UBC) Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Inserting and Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Installing the Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Four Slot Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Chapter 9. Software Installation on Development PC
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 3
Required System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
SMDK for eVC4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
SMDK for .NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
DCP for MC9000w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
®
xii
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Chapter 10. Configuring the Mobile Computer
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3
Starting Terminal Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Defining Script Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Creating the Script for the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Opening a New or Existing Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Updating TCM 1.X Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Copying Components to the Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Saving the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Building the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Sending the Hex Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
TCM Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
IPL Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Creating a Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Splash Screen Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Working with FFS Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
RegMerge.dll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
CopyFiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Non-FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Partition Update vs. File Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Upgrade Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Chapter 11. Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K- 3
Maintaining the Mobile Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Four Slot Charge Only Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-7
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-8
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10
Contents
xiii
Magnetic Stripe Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-12
Appendix A. Block Recognizer
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 3
Appendix B. Demo Program
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 3
SelfTest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
MSR 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
MSR Cameo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Scanning Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Ctl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
System Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Unique Unit ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Persist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Power Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Touch Calibrate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Printer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
®
xiv
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Scanner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Symbol Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
PC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Appendix C. ImagerSample
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 3
Launching ImagerSample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Focus Near . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Appendix D. Specifications
Contents
xv
Appendix E. Keypad Maps
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E- 3
Keypads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
43-Key Keypad Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
53-Key Keypad Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
3270 Emulator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
5250 Emulator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
VT Emulator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40
Glossary
Index
®
xvi
MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
About This Guide
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Symbol Support Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
®
xviii MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
xix
This Product Reference Guide provides information about the MC9000-K and MC9000-S mobile
computers using the Microsoft® Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs, and its accessories.
The MC9000-K and MC9000-S mobile computers include the following variations:
•
MC9010: Windows® Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system performs 1-
dimensional bar code scanning with integrated laser scanner, or 1-dimensional and 2-
dimensional bar code scanning with integrated imager; 802.11 Spectrum24® wireless
technology to perform local area network (LAN) communication; memory configuration 64
MB ROM/64 MB RAM; 43-key, 53-key, 3250 Emulator, 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator
interchangeable keypads; QVGA monochrome touch panel display.
•
MC9050: Windows® Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system performs 1-
dimensional bar code scanning with integrated laser scanner, or 1-dimensional and 2-
dimensional bar code scanning with integrated imager; 802.11b Spectrum24® wireless
technology to perform local area network (LAN) communication; memory configuration 64
MB ROM/64 MB RAM; 43-key, 53-key, 3250 Emulator, 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator
interchangeable keypads; QVGA monochrome or color touch panel display; VoIP.
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
•
Chapter 1, Getting Started lists the accessories for the mobile computer and explains how
to install and charge the batteries, replace the hand strap and start the mobile computer for
the first time.
•
Chapter 2, Operating explains the physical buttons and controls on the mobile computer,
how to use the mobile computer, including instructions for powering on and resetting the
mobile computer, using the stylus and a headset, entering information and scanning.
•
•
•
•
Chapter 3, Settings explains how to adjust settings on the mobile computer and remove
programs.
communication between the mobile computer and host computer.
Chapter 5, Spectrum24 Configuration describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless
connection.
Chapter 6, AirBEAM Smart explains how to set up the mobile computer to synchronize with
a server using the AirBEAM® Client and AirBEAM Staging applications.
®
xx MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
•
•
•
Chapter 7, Applications describes how to use the applications installed on the mobile
computer.
Chapter 8, Accessories describes the accessories available for the mobile computer and
how to setup power connections and battery charging capabilities, where applicable.
Chapter 9, Software Installation on Development PC provides instructions for installing the
Device Configuration Package (DCP) for MC9000w, the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit
(SMDK) for eVC4 and the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET on the host
computer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 10, Configuring the Mobile Computer describes how to install and use the Terminal
Configuration Manager (TCM) and Initial Program Loader (IPL).
Chapter 11, Maintenance & Troubleshooting provides information to help you take proper
care of the mobile computer and solve problems that may come up.
Chapter A, Block Recognizer describes how to using the Block Recognizer to write
characters.
Chapter B, Demo Program provides an overview of the mobile computer demo program
applications, such as scanning, setup, diagnostic utilities and file management.
Chapter C, ImagerSample provides an overview of the ImagerSample program for capturing
images with the mobile computer.
Chapter D, Specifications includes a table listing the technical specifications for the mobile
computer.
Chapter E, Keypad Maps includes tables listing key functionality for each keypad.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
•
•
•
“Mobile computer” refers to any Symbol terminal.
“User” refers to anyone using an application on the terminal.
“You” refers to the End User, System Administrator or Technical Support person using this
manual as a reference to install, configure, operate, maintain and troubleshoot the terminal.
•
Italics are used to highlight the following:
• chapters and sections in this and related documents
• dialog box, window and screen names
• drop-down list and list box names
• check box and radio button names
xxi
• icons on a screen.
•
•
Bold text is used to highlight the following:
• key names on a keypad
• button names on a screen.
Bullets (•) indicate:
• action items
• lists of alternatives
• lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
•
Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered
lists.
Related Documents and Software
The following documents provide more information about the MC9000-G mobile computer.
•
•
•
•
MC9000-G Quick Start Poster, p/n 72-63360-xx
MC9000-G Licensing, Patent and Regulatory Information, p/n 72-65259-xx
Windows CE Help File for Symbol Terminals, p/n 72E-38880-xx
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for eMbedded Visual C++ v4.0 (SMDK for eVC4), available at:
•
•
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET (SMDK for .NET), available at:
Device Configuration Package for MC9000w (DCP for MC9000w), available at:
•
•
eConnect software, available at: http://devzone.symbol.com
ActiveSync software, available at the Microsoft web site:
Service Information
page xxii for contact information. Before calling, have the model number, serial number and several
bar code symbols at hand.
®
xxii MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Call the Support Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try
to talk you through the problem. If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is
symbol readability, the Support Center will request samples of bar codes for analysis at our plant.
If the problem cannot be solved over the phone, you may need to return the equipment for servicing.
If that is necessary, you will be given specific directions.
Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred
during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used.
Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If the
Note
original shipping container was not kept, contact Symbol to have
another sent to you.
Symbol Support Center
For service information, warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol
Support Center in:
United States
Canada
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
1-800-653-5350
Symbol Technologies Canada, Inc.
2540 Matheson Boulevard East
Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L4W 4Z2
905-629-7226
United Kingdom
Asia/Pacific
Symbol Technologies
Symbol Place
Winnersh Triangle, Berkshire RG41 5TP
United Kingdom
Symbol Technologies Asia, Inc (Singapore Branch)
230 Victoria Street #05-07/09
Bugis Junction Office Tower
Singapore 188024
0800 328 2424 (Inside UK)
+44 118 945 7529 (Outside UK)
Tel: +65-6796-9600
Fax: +65-6337-6488
Australia
Austria/Österreich
Symbol Technologies Pty. Ltd.
432 St. Kilda Road
Melbourne, Victoria 3004
1-800-672-906 (Inside Australia)
+61-3-9866-6044 (Outside Australia)
Symbol Technologies Austria GmbH
Prinz-Eugen Strasse 70 / 2.Haus
1040 Vienna, Austria
01-5055794-0 (Inside Austria)
+43-1-5055794-0 (Outside Austria)
xxiii
Denmark/Danmark
Symbol Technologies AS
Dr. Neergaardsvej 3
Europe/Mid-East Distributor Operations
Contact your local distributor or call
+44 118 945 7360
2970 Hørsholm
7020-1718 (Inside Denmark)
+45-7020-1718 (Outside Denmark)
Finland/Suomi
France
Oy Symbol Technologies
Kaupintie 8 A 6
FIN-00440 Helsinki, Finland
9 5407 580 (Inside Finland)
+358 9 5407 580 (Outside Finland)
Symbol Technologies France
Centre d'Affaire d'Antony
3 Rue de la Renaissance
92184 Antony Cedex, France
01-40-96-52-21 (Inside France)
+33-1-40-96-52-50 (Outside France)
Germany/Deutchland
Italy/Italia
Symbol Technologies GmbH
Waldstrasse 66
D-63128 Dietzenbach, Germany
6074-49020 (Inside Germany)
+49-6074-49020 (Outside Germany)
Symbol Technologies Italia S.R.L.
Via Cristoforo Columbo, 49
20090 Trezzano S/N Navigilo
Milano, Italy
2-484441 (Inside Italy)
+39-02-484441 (Outside Italy)
Latin America Sales Support
2730 University Dr.
Coral Springs, FL 33065 USA
1-800-347-0178 (Inside United States)
+1-954-255-2610 (Outside United States)
954-340-9454 (Fax)
Mexico/México
Symbol Technologies Mexico Ltd.
Torre Picasso
Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88
Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000
Mexico City, DF, Mexico
5-520-1835 (Inside Mexico)
+52-5-520-1835 (Outside Mexico)
®
xxiv MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Netherlands/Nederland
Symbol Technologies
Kerkplein 2, 7051 CX
Norway/Norge
Symbol’s registered and mailing address:
Symbol Technologies Norway
Hoybratenveien 35 C
Postbus 24 7050 AA
Varsseveld, Netherlands
315-271700 (Inside Netherlands)
+31-315-271700 (Outside Netherlands)
N-1055 OSLO, Norway
Symbol’s repair depot and shipping address:
Symbol Technologies Norway
Enebakkveien 123
N-0680 OSLO, Norway
+47 2232 4375
South Africa
Spain/España
Symbol Technologies Africa Inc.
Block B2
Rutherford Estate
Symbol Technologies S.L.
Avenida de Bruselas, 22
Edificio Sauce
1 Scott Street
Alcobendas, Madrid 28108
Spain
91 324 40 00 (Inside Spain)
+34 91 324 40 00 (Outside Spain)
Fax: +34.91.324.4010
Waverly 2090 Johannesburg
Republic of South Africa
11-809 5311 (Inside South Africa)
+27-11-809 5311 (Outside South Africa)
Sweden/Sverige
“Letter” address:
Symbol Technologies AB
Box 1354
S-171 26 SOLNA
Sweden
Visit/shipping address:
Symbol Technologies AB
Solna Strandväg 78
S-171 54 SOLNA
Sweden
Switchboard: 08 445 29 00 (domestic)
Call Center: +46 8 445 29 29 (international)
Support E-Mail: Sweden.Support@se.symbol.com
xxv
If you purchased your Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner
for service.
®
xxvi MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Getting Started
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3
Unpacking the Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Installing and Removing the Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Installing the Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Removing the Main Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Charging the Main Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Charging Spare Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Strap Lanyard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Starting the Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Calibrating the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
®
1-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Setting Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Getting Started
1-3
This chapter lists the accessories for the mobile computer and explains how to install and charge the
batteries, replace the hand strap and start the mobile computer for the first time.
Headphone Jack
Microphone
Indicator LED Bar
Touch Screen
Keypad
Exit Window
Scan Button
Power
Trigger
Strap
Lanyard
Stylus
Figure 1-1. MC9000-G
®
1-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Unpacking the Mobile Computer
Carefully remove all protective material from around the mobile computer and save the shipping
container for later storage and shipping.
Verify that you received all equipment listed below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
mobile computer
lithium-ion battery
handstrap, attached to the mobile computer
stylus, in the handstrap stylus silo
Regulatory Guide
Quick Start Guide (poster).
Inspect the equipment for damage. If you are missing any equipment or if you find any damaged
information.
Getting Started
1-5
Accessories
•
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle: Charges the mobile computer main battery and a spare
battery. It also synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through either a
serial or a USB connection.
•
•
Four Slot Charge Only Cradle: Charges the mobile computer main battery.
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle: Charges the mobile computer main battery and synchronizes the
mobile computer with a host computer through an Ethernet connection.
•
•
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger: Charges up to four mobile computer spare batteries.
Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR): Snaps on to the mobile computer and adds magstripe read
capabilities.
•
•
•
Holster: Holds the mobile computer when not in use.
Headphone: Use in noisy environments.
Cable Adapter Module (CAM): Snap-on required to connect the following cables to the
mobile computer.
• AC line cord (country-specific) and power supply, charges the mobile computer.
• Auto charge cable, charges the mobile computer using a vehicle’s cigarette lighter.
• DEX cable, connects the mobile computer to a vending machine.
• Serial cable, adds serial communication capabilities.
• USB cable, adds USB communication capabilities.
• Printer cable, adds printer communication capabilities.
Universal Battery Charger Adapter: Adapts the UBC for use with the Series 9000 batteries.
Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide: Use for wall mounting applications.
Optional Keypads: Application specific keypads.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multimedia Card (MMC): Provides secondary non-volatile storage.
Spare lithium-ion battery.
Stylus, performs pen functions.
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for eMbedded Visual C++ v4.0 (SMDK for eVC4), available at:
•
•
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET (SMDK for .NET), available at:
Device Configuration Package for MC9000w (DCP for MC9000w), available at:
®
1-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Getting Started
In order to start using the mobile computer for the first time:
•
•
•
•
install the main battery
charge the main battery and backup battery
start the mobile computer
configure the mobile computer.
The main battery can be charged before or after it is installed. Use one of the spare battery chargers
to charge the main battery (out of the mobile computer), or one of the cradles to charge the main
battery installed in the mobile computer.
Installing and Removing the Main Battery
Installing the Main Battery
Before using the mobile computer, install a lithium-ion battery by sliding the battery into the mobile
Ensure the battery is fully inserted. Two audible clicks can be heard as the battery is fully
inserted. A partially inserted battery may result in unintentional data loss.
Note
When a battery is fully inserted in a mobile computer for the first time, upon the mobile
computer’s first power up, the device boots and powers on automatically.
Figure 1-2. Installing the Main Battery
Getting Started
1-7
Removing the Main Battery
To remove the main battery:
1. Press the red Power button to turn off the screen. This sets the mobile computer to suspend
mode.
2. Simultaneously press both primary battery releases. The battery partially ejects from the
mobile computer.
3. Press the secondary battery release, on top of the battery, and slide the battery out of the
mobile computer.
Primary Battery Releases
Secondary Battery Release
Figure 1-3. Removing the Main Battery
®
1-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Charging the Battery
Charging the Main Battery and Memory Backup Battery
Before using the mobile computer for the first time, charge the main battery until the amber charge
indicator light remains lit (see Table 1-1 on page 1-9 for charge status indications). Charge time is less
than four hours. The mobile computer can be charged using a cradle, the CAM with a charging cable,
or the MSR with the appropriate power supply.
The mobile computer is equipped with a memory backup battery which automatically charges from
the fully-charged main battery. When the mobile computer is used for the first time, the backup
battery requires approximately 15 hours to fully charge. This is also true any time the backup battery
is discharged, which occurs when the main battery is removed for several hours. The backup battery
retains data in memory for at least 30 minutes when the mobile computer's main battery is removed.
When the mobile computer reaches a very low battery state, the combination of main battery and
backup battery retains data in memory for at least 72 hours.
Do not remove the main battery within the first 15 hours of use. If the main
battery is removed before the backup battery is fully charged, data may be
Note
lost.
The following accessories can be used to charge batteries.
•
•
•
Cradles: The mobile computer slips into the cradles for charging the battery in the mobile
computer (and spare batteries, where applicable). For detailed cradle setup and charging
procedures see:
Accessories: The mobile computer’s snap-on accessories provide charging capability, when
used with one of the accessory charging cables. For detailed snap-on setup and charging
procedures see:
Chargers: The mobile computer’s spare battery charging accessories are used to charge
batteries that are removed from the mobile computer. For detailed spare battery charging
accessories setup and charging procedures see:
Getting Started
1-9
Charging the Main Battery
You can charge the main battery in the mobile computer using a cradle, the CAM with a charging
cable, or the MSR with the appropriate power supply.
1. Ensure the accessory used to charge the main battery is connected to the appropriate power
2. Insert the mobile computer into a cradle or attach the appropriate snap-on module.
3. The mobile computer starts to charge automatically. The amber charge LED, in the Indicator
The main battery usually fully charges in less than four hours.
Table 1-1. Mobile Computer LED Charge Indicators
LED
Indication
Off
Mobile computer not in cradle/CAM/MSR; mobile computer not placed correctly;
charger is not powered.
Fast Blinking Amber
Slow Blinking Amber
Solid Amber
Error in charging; check placement of the mobile computer.
Mobile computer is charging.
Charging complete.
Note: When the battery is initially inserted in the mobile computer, the amber LED
flashes once if the battery power is low or the battery is not fully inserted.
Charging Spare Batteries
The mobile computer has three accessories that can be used to charge spare batteries.
•
•
•
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger
UBC Adapter.
To charge a spare battery:
1. Ensure the accessory used to charge the spare battery is connected to the appropriate power
®
1-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. Insert the spare battery into the accessory’s spare battery charging slot with the charging
contacts facing down (over the charging pins) and gently press down on the battery to
ensure proper contact.
3. The battery starts to charge automatically. The amber charge LED on the accessory lights to
accessory.
The battery usually fully charges in less than four hours.
Stylus
Use the mobile computer stylus for selecting items and entering information. The stylus functions as
a mouse.
•
•
Tap: Touch the screen once with the stylus to press option buttons and open menu items.
Tap and Hold: Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available for that
item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action you want to perform.
•
Drag: Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images.
Drag in a list to select multiple items.
To remove the stylus:
Pull the stylus cord down and outward to remove the stylus.
Figure 1-4. Removing the Stylus
Getting Started
1-11
To replace stylus:
Push the stylus back into the storage position. The stylus automatically locks in place.
®
1-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Strap Lanyard
The strap lanyard may be moved to either the left or right side of the mobile computer to suit user
preferences.
To reposition the strap lanyard:
1. Disconnect the strap lanyard disconnect clip.
2. Open loop and slide the disconnect clip through the loop.
3. Slide the loop out of the connector post.
4. Repeat the procedure on the remaining connector to remove the strap lanyard.
5. Reverse the procedure to re-attach the strap lanyard. Two strap lanyard connectors are
provided on the mobile computer’s main body. The strap lanyard cord may be attached to
either connector.
Strap Lanyard
Cord Loop
Strap Lanyard
Disconnect Clip
Strap Lanyard Connectors
Loop Connection Details
Figure 1-5. Reposition the Strap Lanyard
Getting Started
1-13
Starting the Mobile Computer
Press the Power button to turn on the mobile computer. If the mobile computer does not power on,
When a battery is fully inserted in a mobile computer for the first time, upon the mobile
computer’s first power up, the device boots and powers on automatically.
Note
When the mobile computer is powered on for the first time, it initializes its system. The Symbol splash
Pocket PC window.
Figure 1-6. Symbol Splash Screen
Remove the stylus from the handle and tap the Microsoft® Windows® Powered Pocket PC window
with the stylus to display align screen (Figure 1-7), where the screen is calibrated. Note that these
windows also appear every time you perform a cold boot.
®
1-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Calibrating the Screen
To calibrate the screen so the cursor on the touch screen aligns with the tip of the stylus:
1. Using the stylus carefully press and briefly hold the tip of stylus on the center of each target
that appears on the screen.
Figure 1-7. Align Screen
To re-calibrate the screen at anytime, press FUNC + Esc on the mobile
computer to launch the calibration screen application.
Note
Getting Started
1-15
2. Follow the directions on the screen which lead you through a simple exercise illustrating
how to use the stylus and pop-up menus.
Figure 1-8. Using Pop-up Menus
3. Use the drop-down list to set your time zone, and tap Next.
Figure 1-9. Setting Time Zone
4. Tap the Complete screen to complete the initial setup.
®
1-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Today screen.)
Figure 1-10. Today Screen
Setting Time and Date
When the mobile computer is powered on for the first time, and after a cold boot, tap Start - Settings
- System tab - Clock icon to use the clock control panel applet to set the time zone, time and date.
Figure 1-11. Setting Time and Date
Getting Started
1-17
Note
Checking Battery Status
To check whether the main battery or backup battery in the mobile computer is charged, tap Start -
Settings - System tab - Power icon to display the Battery Status window.
Figure 1-12. Battery Status Screen
To save battery power, set the mobile computer to turn off after a specified number of minutes. See
Power on page 3-43 to set power management options.
®
1-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Configuring the Mobile Computer
Refer to the following chapters to configure the mobile computer:
•
•
To set up ActiveSync to synchronize the mobile computer with the host computer, see
•
•
•
•
To configure the mobile computer for Spectrum24, see Chapter 5, Spectrum24
To set up AirBEAM to synchronize the mobile computer with the host server, see Chapter 6,
To install development software on the development PC, see Chapter 9, Software
To configure the mobile computer using the Terminal Configuration Manager, see Chapter
Operating
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
43-Key Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
53-Key Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3270 Emulator Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
5250 Emulator Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
VT Emulator Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Keypad Special Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Using the Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Using a Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Speaker Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
®
2-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Battery Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Connectivity Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Time Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Instant Message Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
E-Mail Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Multiple Notification Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Selecting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Using Pop-up Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Entering Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Using the Soft Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Using the Letter Recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Using the Transcriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Writing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Converting Writing to Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Writing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Selecting Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Selecting Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Drawing on the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Selecting a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Recording a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Using My Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Entering Information Using Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Finding Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Data Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Laser Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Aiming the Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Operational Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Scanning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Scanning Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
®
2-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Introduction
This chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on the mobile computer, how to use the
mobile computer, including instructions for powering on and resetting the mobile computer, using the
stylus and a headset, entering information and scanning.
Keypads
The mobile computer has five interchangeable modular keypad configurations:
•
•
•
•
•
43-key keypad
53-key keypad
3270 Emulator
5250 Emulator
VT Emulator.
The modular keypads can be changed in the field, as necessary, to support specialized applications.
For detailed keypad information, including ASCII values and VK codes, see
Note
For information about using the soft keyboard input panel, see Entering Information
Operating
2-5
43-Key Keypad
The 43-key keypad contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function key. The
keypad is color-coded to indicate the alternate function key (blue) values and the alternate ALPHA key
(orange) values. Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile
.
.
Figure 2-1. 43-Key Keypad
®
2-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 2-1. 43-Key Descriptions
Key
Description
Power (red)
Powers the mobile computer on and off.
Performs a warm boot when held for five seconds and a cold boot when held for 15
seconds.
Green/Red Dot
Unassigned function key. (Button includes a green or red dot.)
.
Scan (yellow)
Scan key - used for scanning applications, this key has the same function as pulling the
trigger.
Scroll Up and Down
Scroll Left and Right
ESC
Moves up and down from one item to another.
Increases/decreases specified values.
Moves left and right from one item to another.
Increases/decreases specified values.
Exits the current operation.
SPACE/BKSP
Space and backspace functions.
Numeric/Alpha
Number or alpha value depending on the state of the ALPHA key.
. . .
Alpha/Application
These keys can have an application assigned to the function value and have an alpha
value assigned when used with the ALPHA function key.
. . .
Function (blue)
Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions
(shown on the keypad in blue). The keypad LED lights. Press and release the blue
function key again to return to the normal keypad functions.
LED
Control
Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions. The
keypad LED lights. Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad
functions.
LED
Operating
2-7
Table 2-1. 43-Key Descriptions (Continued)
Key
Description
ALT
Press and release the ALT key to activate the keypad ALT (alternate) functions. Press and
release the ALT key again to return to the normal keypad functions.
ALPHA (orange)
The default keypad mode is the num-lock (number lock) mode. Press the orange ALPHA
key to de-activate the num-lock mode and to access the alternate ALPHA characters
(shown on the keypad in orange).
LED
Shift
Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions. Press
and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions.
Period/Decimal Point
Produces a period for alpha entries, a decimal point for numeric entries and the
alphabetic character X when the ALPHA function key is activated.
Star
Produces an asterisk and the alphabetic character Z when the ALPHA function key is
activated.
Enter
Executes a selected item or function.
For detailed keypad information, including ASCII values and VK codes, see
Note
For information about using the soft keyboard input panel, see Entering Information
®
2-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
53-Key Keypad
The 53-key keypad contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and function keys. The
keypad is color-coded to indicate the alternate function key (blue) values. Note that keypad functions
can be changed by an application so the mobile computer’s keypad may not function exactly as
the keypad’s special functions.
.
.
Figure 2-2. 53-Key Keypad
Operating
2-9
Table 2-2. 53-Key Descriptions
Key
Description
Power (red)
Powers the mobile computer on and off.
Performs a warm boot when held for five seconds and a cold boot when
held for 15 seconds.
Green/Red Dot
Scan (yellow)
Unassigned function key. (Button includes a green or red dot.)
.
Scan key - used for scanning applications, this key has the same
function as pulling the trigger.
Scroll Up and Down
Scroll Left and Right
ESC
Moves up and down from one item to another.
Increases/decreases specified values.
Moves left and right from one item to another.
Increases/decreases specified values.
Exits the current operation.
Alpha
Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters.
Space and backspace functions.
. . .
SPACE/BKSP
Numeric/Application
Numeric value keys - can have applications assigned with function
key(s).
. . .
Function (blue)
Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate
functions (shown on the keypad in blue). The keypad LED lights. Press
and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad
functions.
LED
Control
Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL
functions. The keypad LED lights. Press and release the CTRL key again
to return to the normal keypad functions.
LED
®
2-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 2-2. 53-Key Descriptions (Continued)
Key
Description
Shift
Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT
functions.Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal
keypad functions.
Period/Decimal Point
Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric
entries.
Star
Produces an asterisk.
Enter
Executes a selected item or function.
For detailed keypad information, including ASCII values and VK codes, see
Note
For information about using the soft keyboard input panel, see Entering Information
Operating
2-11
3270 Emulator Keypad
The 3270 emulator keypad contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function key.
The keypad is color-coded to indicate the alternate function key (blue) values. Note that keypad
functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer’s keypad may not function exactly
for the keypad’s special functions.
.
.
Figure 2-3. 3270 Emulator Keypad
The 3270 emulator keypad is only used when the mobile computer is running
the 3270 emulation software. When the mobile computer is not running the
3270 emulation software, the 3270 keypad functions are the same as a 53-
key keypad.
Note
®
2-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 2-3. 3270 Emulator Descriptions
Key
Description
Power (red)
Powers the mobile computer on and off.
Performs a warm boot when held for five seconds and a cold boot when
held for 15 seconds.
Green/Red Dot
Scan (yellow)
Unassigned function key. (Button includes a green or red dot.)
.
Scan key - used for scanning applications, this key has the same
function as pulling the trigger.
Scroll Up and Down
Scroll Left and Right
CLR
Moves up and down from one item to another.
Increases/decreases specified values.
Moves left and right from one item to another.
Increases/decreases specified values.
Exits the current operation.
Alpha
Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters.
. . .
SPACE/BKSP
Application
Space and backspace functions.
These keys can be assigned to an application.
. . .
Function (blue)
Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate
functions (shown on the keypad in blue). The keypad LED lights. Press
and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad
functions.
LED
Control
Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL
functions. The keypad LED lights. Press and release the CTRL key again
to return to the normal keypad functions.
LED
Operating
2-13
Table 2-3. 3270 Emulator Descriptions (Continued)
Key
Description
Shift
Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT
functions. Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal
keypad functions.
Period/Decimal Point
Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric
entries.
Star
Produces an asterisk.
Enter
Executes a selected item or function.
For detailed keypad information, including ASCII values and VK codes, see
Note
For information about using the soft keyboard input panel, see Entering Information
®
2-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
5250 Emulator Keypad
The 5250 emulator keypad contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function key.
The keypad is color-coded to indicate the alternate function key (blue) values. Note that keypad
functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer’s keypad may not function exactly
for the keypad’s special functions.
.
.
Figure 2-4. 5250 Emulator Keypad
The 5250 emulator configuration is only used when the mobile computer is
running the 5250 emulation software. When the mobile computer is not
running the 5250 emulation software, the 5250 keypad functions are the
same as a 53-key keypad.
Note
Operating
2-15
Table 2-4. 5250 Emulator Descriptions
Key
Description
Power (red)
Powers the mobile computer on and off.
Performs a warm boot when held for five seconds and a cold boot when
held for 15 seconds.
Green/Red Dot
Scan (yellow)
Unassigned function key. (Button includes a green or red dot.)
.
Scan key - used for scanning applications, this key has the same function
as pulling the trigger.
Scroll Up and Down
Scroll Left and Right
ENT
Moves up and down from one item to another.
Moves left and right from one item to another.
Exits the current operation.
Alpha
Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters.
. . .
SPACE/BKSP
Application
Space and backspace functions.
These keys can be assigned to an application.
. . .
Function (blue)
Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate
functions (shown on the keypad in blue). The keypad LED lights. Press and
release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad
functions.
LED
Control
Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL
functions. The keypad LED lights. Press and release the CTRL key again to
return to the normal keypad functions.
LED
®
2-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 2-4. 5250 Emulator Descriptions (Continued)
Key
Description
Shift
Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT
functions. Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal
keypad functions.
Period/Decimal Point
Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries.
Star
Produces an asterisk.
Enter
Executes a selected item or function.
For detailed keypad information, including ASCII values and VK codes, see
Note
For information about using the soft keyboard input panel, see Entering Information
Operating
2-17
VT Emulator Keypad
The VT emulator keypad contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function key. The
keypad is color-coded to indicate the alternate function key (blue) values. Note that keypad functions
can be changed by an application so the mobile computer’s keypad may not function exactly as
described. See Table 2-5 on page 2-18 for key and button descriptions and Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for
the keypad’s special functions.
.
.
Figure 2-5. VT Emulator Keypad
The VT emulator configuration is only used when the mobile computer is
running the VT emulation software. When the mobile computer is not running
the VT emulation software, the VT keypad functions are the same as a 53-key
keypad.
Note
®
2-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 2-5. VT Emulator Descriptions
Key
Description
Power (red)
Powers the mobile computer on and off.
Performs a warm boot when held for five seconds and a cold boot when
held for 15 seconds.
Green/Red Dot
Scan (yellow)
Unassigned function key. (Button includes a green or red dot.)
.
Scan key - used for scanning applications, this key has the same
function as pulling the trigger.
Scroll Up and Down
Scroll Left and Right
ESC
Moves up and down from one item to another.
Moves left and right from one item to another.
Exits the current operation.
Alpha
Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters.
. . .
SPACE/BKSP
Application
Space and backspace functions.
These keys can be assigned to an application.
. . .
Function (blue)
Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate
functions (shown on the keypad in blue). The keypad LED lights. Press
and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad
functions.
LED
Control
Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL
functions. The keypad LED lights. Press and release the CTRL key again
to return to the normal keypad functions.
LED
Operating
2-19
Table 2-5. VT Emulator Descriptions (Continued)
Key
Description
Shift
Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT
functions. Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal
keypad functions.
Period/Decimal Point
Produces a period for alpha entries and decimal point for numeric
entries.
Star
Produces an asterisk.
Enter
Executes a selected item or function.
For detailed keypad information, including ASCII values and VK codes, see
Note
For information about using the soft keyboard input panel, see Entering Information
®
2-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Keypad Special Functions
The keypad special functions are color coded on the keypads. For example, on the 53-key keypad, the
display backlight icon is blue indicating that the blue function key must be selected first to access the
display backlight. On the 43-key keypad, the display backlight icon is white indicating that the display
backlight is the default value for that key.
Table 2-6. Keypad Special Functions
53-Key, 3270,
5250, VT
Icon
43-Key Keystrokes
Keystrokes
Special Function
key
Blue function key Turns on and off the display backlight.
and Z
key
Blue function key Turns on and off the keypad backlight.
and X
Blue function key
Blue function key Increases display contrast (on monochrome units
and F1
and D
only).
Blue function key
Blue function key Decreases display contrast (on monochrome units
and F5
and I only).
Blue function key
Blue function key Increases scan decode beeper volume.
and F4
and H
Blue function key
Blue function key Decreases scan decode beeper volume.
and F8
and M
*
Not Available
Blue function key Enables Alt keypad functions.
and CTRL
Use of display and keypad backlighting can significantly reduce battery life.
Mobile computers with color screens do not have contrast settings.
Note
Operating
2-21
Using the Power Button
Press the red Power button to turn the mobile computer screen on and off (suspend mode). The mobile
computer is on when the screen is on and the mobile computer is in suspend mode when the screen
The Power button is also used to reset the mobile computer by performing a warm or cold boot.
•
•
Warm Boot (Soft Reset) - Resets the mobile computer.
Cold Boot (Hard Reset) - Resets the mobile computer, removes all added applications and
restores all factory default settings.
For information about booting the mobile computer, refer to Resetting the Mobile Computer on page
2-51.
®
2-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Using a Headset
You can use a stereo headset to listen to mono audio playback. To use a headset, plug the headset
jack into the audio connector on the top of the mobile computer. Ensure that the mobile computer’s
volume is set appropriately before putting the headset on. When a headset is plugged into the jack,
the speaker is muted.
Figure 2-6. Using a Headset
Operating
2-23
Today Screen
When you turn on the mobile computer for the first time each day (or after 4 hours of inactivity), the
Today screen appears. You can also display it by tapping Start - Today. On the Today screen, you can
see important information for the day.
Tap to switch to
a program
Tap to change volume or mute all sounds
Tap to change the date and time
Tap to open an item
The day at a glance
Tap to create a new item
Tap to view connection status
Figure 2-7. Today Screen
The Today screen may vary depending on the mobile computer configuration.
Note
The Today screen can be customized. Tap Start - Settings - Today icon. Use the Appearance tab to
customize the background and the Items tab to change the list and order of items that appear on the
screen.
®
2-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar
The navigation bar at the top of the screen displays the active program, various status icons (see
Table 2-7) and current time. It also allows you to select programs and close screens.
Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar
includes menu names, buttons, and the Input Panel button. To create a new item in the current
program, tap New. To see the name of a button, hold the stylus on the button. Drag the stylus off the
button so the command is not carried out.
Tap to change volume or mute all sounds
Tap to close program
Tap to quickly select a program
you have recently used
Tap to select a program
Tap to see additional programs
Tap to customize the device
Input Panel
New button.
button
Menu names Buttons
Figure 2-8. Screen Navigation
Operating
2-25
Status Icons
You may see the status icons listed in Table 2-7 on the navigation bar located at the top of the screen.
Table 2-7. Status Icons
Icon
Function
Description
Turns all sounds on and off.
Speaker
Battery
Backup battery is very low (not enabled).
Main battery is charging.*
Main battery is low.
Main battery is very low.
Main battery is full.*
Connectivity
Connection is active.
Synchronization is occurring.
No connection.
X
Instant Message
E-Mail
Notification that one or more instant messages
were received.
Notification that one or more e-mail messages
were received.
Time and Next
Appointment
Displays current time in analog or digital format.
Multiple Notifications
There are more notification icons than can be
displayed. Tap to display remaining icons.
* Only appears in the Time and Next Appointment dialog box.
®
2-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Speaker Icon
You can adjust the system volume using the Speaker icon in the Navigation bar.
1. Tap the Speaker icon. The Volume dialog box appears.
Figure 2-9. Volume Dialog Box
2. Tap and move the slide bar to adjust the volume.
3. Select the On or Off radio button to turn the volume on or off.
The system volume can also be adjusted using the Sounds & Notifications
Note
Operating
2-27
Battery Icon
Battery icons display on the Navigation Bar when the main battery or backup battery power falls
below a predetermined level. A Battery dialog box also appears indicating the status of the main or
backup battery. On mobile computers with color displays, the Main Battery Low text is blue and the
Main Battery Very Low text is red.
Figure 2-10. Battery Status Dialog Box
on page 3-43 for more information.
Note
Operating
2-29
Time Icon
The Time icon displays the current time in a digital or analog format. To change the time format, tap
and hold the Time icon until a menu appears. Select the format you want.
Digital Clock
Analog Clock
Figure 2-12. Time Icon Format Menu
To display current date, time and appointments:
1. Tap the Time icon to display the Time and Next Appointment dialog box.
Current Date and Time
Battery Status Icon
Upcoming Appointments
Figure 2-13. Time and Next Appointment Dialog Box
®
2-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. The dialog box displays the current date and time, the battery status and any upcoming
appointments in the Calendar.
Instant Message Icon
The Instant Message icon notifies you when MSN Messenger has received a new incoming message.
Figure 2-14. MSN Messenger Dialog Box
®
2-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Selecting Programs
To select a program, tap Start - Programs, then the program name. (To select which programs appear
Figure 2-17. Start Menu
Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-down list.
To see the full label, hold the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label
so that the command is not carried out.
Note
Operating
2-33
Using Pop-up Menus
With pop-up menus, you can quickly choose an action for an item. For example, use the pop-up menu
in the contact list to delete a contact, make a copy of a contact, or send an e-mail message to a
contact. The actions in the pop-up menus vary from program to program.
To access a pop-up menu, hold the stylus on the item you want to perform the action on. When the
menu appears, lift the stylus, and tap the action to perform, or tap outside the menu to close it without
performing an action.
Tap and hold to display
the pop-up menu.
Lift the stylus and tap the
action you want.
Tap outside the menu to
close it without
performing an action.
Figure 2-18. Pop-up Menu
®
2-34 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Notifications
The mobile computer notifies you when you have something to do. For example, if you've set up an
appointment in Calendar, a task with a due date in Tasks, or an alarm in Clock, you'll be notified in
any of the following ways:
•
•
a message box appears on the screen
a sound, which you can set, is played.
To choose reminder types and sounds for the mobile computer, tap Start - Settings - Personal tab -
Sounds & Notifications icon. Select the desired options. See Sounds & Notifications on page 3-22 for
more information.
Entering Information
To enter information, you may:
•
functions.)
•
•
•
•
•
Use the input panel to enter typed text, either using the soft keypad or writing characters.
Write directly on the screen.
Draw pictures on the screen.
Speak into the microphone to record a message.
Scan bar code data into data fields (mobile computers with an integrated scanner only).
•
Use the Imager to scan bar code data and capture still images (mobile computers with an
integrated imager only).
•
Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information from the host computer to the
ActiveSync Help on the host computer.
Entering Information Using the Input Panel
Use the input panel to enter information in any program. You can either type using the soft keyboard
or write using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber. In any case, the characters appear
as typed text on the screen.
Operating
2-35
To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the arrow next to this button to view
input methods.
Select an input method.
Tap to see choices.
Input Panel Button
Figure 2-19. Input Panel Button
When you use the input panel, the mobile computer anticipates the word you are typing or writing
and displays it above the input panel. When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into the text at
the insertion point. The more you use the mobile computer, the more words it learns to anticipate.
To change input settings, such as the number of words suggested at one time, select Options from
the Input Panel menu, and tap the tabs to see each setting screen.
Figure 2-20. Input Panel Options
Using the Soft Keyboard
To type with the Soft Keyboard:
1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Keyboard.
®
2-36 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. On the Soft Keyboard, tap the keys with the stylus.
Tap here if this is the right word.
Figure 2-21. Soft Keyboard
Using the Block Recognizer
To use the Block Recognizer:
1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Block Recognizer.
2. Write a letter in the left side of the box, or a number in the right side, using special character
strokes.
Figure 2-22. Block Recognizer
When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text on the screen. For specific instructions on using
Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area, or see
Using the Letter Recognizer
To use Letter Recognizer:
1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Letter Recognizer.
Operating
2-37
2. Write letters or numbers in the writing area, just as you would on paper. Write capital letters
in the left side of the box, numbers in the right side, and lower case letters in the center.
Figure 2-23. Letter Recognizer
When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text on the screen. For specific instructions on using
Letter Recognizer, with Letter Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.
Using the Transcriber
To use Transcriber:
1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Transcriber.
Figure 2-24. Transcriber
2. Write anywhere on the screen.
When you write anywhere on the screen, Transcriber changes the written characters to typed
characters. For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tap the question mark
under to the writing area.
Writing on the Screen
In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program and the Notes tab in Calendar,
Contacts, and Tasks, you can use the stylus to write directly on the screen.
®
2-38 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
To write on the screen, tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode. Lines appear on the screen to
guide you.
Tap the Pen button and use
the stylus like a pen.
Figure 2-25. Writing on the Screen
Some programs that accept writing do not have the Pen button. See the
documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writing mode.
Note
Converting Writing to Text
To convert the writing to text, tap Tools - Recognize.
Operating
2-39
To convert certain words, select them before tapping Recognize on the Tools menu (or tap and hold
the selected words, then tap Recognize on the pop-up menu). If a word is not recognized, it is left as
writing.
Select the text you want to convert and tap
Recognize on the pop-up menu.
The writing is
turned into text.
Figure 2-26. Writing on the Screen
If the conversion is incorrect, select different words from a list of alternates or return to the original
writing. Tap and hold the incorrect word only. On the pop-up menu, tap Alternates. A list of alternate
®
2-40 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
words appears. Tap the word you want to use, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to
the original writing.
Tap to return to the
original writing.
Or, tap the word you
want to use.
Figure 2-27. Alternate List
Writing Tips
•
Write neatly.
•
Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Cross off the "t" and write
apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused with the word above. Write periods
and commas above the line.
•
•
For better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% using the Tools menu.
Leave large gaps between words so the mobile computer can easily tell where words begin
and end.
•
•
Hyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as accents, and some
punctuation cannot be converted.
If you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a "3" to an "8") after you attempt
to recognize the word, the writing you add is not included if you try to recognize the writing
again.
Operating
2-41
Selecting Text
To edit or format typed text, select it by dragging the stylus across the text. Cut, copy, and/or paste
text by holding the selected words then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by
tapping the command on the Edit menu.
Selecting Writing
To select writing to edit or format:
1. Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the insertion point appears.
2. Drag the stylus across the text.
If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Edit - Undo Ink and try again. You can also select text by
tapping the Pen button to deselect it, then dragging the stylus across the screen.
You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text: tap and hold the
selected words, then tap the command from the pop-up menu, or select the command from the Edit
menu.
®
2-42 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Drawing on the Screen
Drawing on the screen is similar to writing on the screen. To create a drawing, cross three ruled lines
on the first stroke. A drawing box appears. Subsequent strokes in or touching the drawing box
become part of the drawing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing.
The drawing box indicates the
boundaries of the drawing.
Pen button.
Figure 2-28. Drawing on the Screen
To change the zoom level, select a zoom level from the Tools menu.
Note
Selecting a Drawing
To select a drawing to edit or format, tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle
appears.
To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button, then drag to select the drawings you want.
To cut, copy, and paste drawings, tap and hold the selected drawing, then tap an editing command
on the pop-up menu, or tap the command from the Edit menu. To resize a drawing, deselect the Pen
button and drag a selection handle.
Operating
2-43
Recording a Message
You may record a message to capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers. In Calendar, Tasks,
and Contacts, you can include a recording in the Notes tab. In the Notes program, you can either
create a stand-alone recording or include a recording in a written note.
To create a recording:
1. Start the Notes application.
2. Tap the Record icon to begin recording.
3. Hold the mobile computer’s microphone near your mouth or other source of sound.
Indicates an embedded
recording.
Tap to begin recording.
Tap to show or hide the
recording toolbar.
Figure 2-29. Recording Screen
4. When you are finished, tap the Stop button. The new recording appears in the note list or
as an embedded icon.
5. To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note.
®
2-44 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Using My Text
When using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert preset or frequently used
messages into the text entry area. To insert a message, tap My Text and tap a message.
Tap to select a
prewritten message.
Figure 2-30. Using My Text
You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sending it.
Note
To edit a My Text message, tap Tools - Edit - My Text Messages. Select the message you wish to edit
and make the changes.
Entering Information Using Keypads
The alphanumeric keypads produce the 26-character alphabet (A-Z), numbers (0-9), function keys and
assorted characters. For detailed information about each keypad available for use with the mobile
Maps.
Operating
2-45
Entering Data
An integrated bar code scanner or imager on the mobile computer can scan data into data fields,
using a scan or image application, in the same way data is entered via the keyboard. In addition,
mobile computers with an integrated imager can capture and store still images. For more information,
Finding Information
The Find feature locates information. Tap Start - Find to launch this feature. Enter the text you want
to find, select a data type, then tap Go.
To find information taking up storage space on the mobile computer, select Larger than 64 KB from
the Type drop-down list.
You can also use the File Explorer to find files and organize them into folders. Tap Start - Programs -
File Explorer to launch Explorer.
Tap to change folders.
Select the sort
order for the list.
Tap the folder
name to open it.
Tap and hold to create
a new folder.
Figure 2-31. File Explorer
To move files in File Explorer, tap and hold the item, then tap Cut or Copy and
Paste on the pop-up menu.
Note
®
2-46 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Data Capture
Mobile computers with an integrated laser scanner allow you to collect data by scanning one
dimensional bar codes.
Mobile computers with an integrated imager allow you to collect data by decoding one dimensional
bar codes (including RSS) and two dimensional bar codes (including PDF417 and DataMatrix), and
capture and download images to a host for a variety of imaging applications.
Laser Scanning
Mobile computers with an integrated laser scanner have the following features:
•
Reading of a variety of bar code symbologies, including the most popular linear, postal, and
1-D code types.
•
Advanced intuitive laser aiming for easy point-and-shoot operation.
Imaging
Mobile computers with an integrated imager have the following features:
•
Omnidirectional reading of a variety of bar code symbologies, including the most popular
linear, postal, PDF417 and 2-D matrix code types.
•
•
The ability to capture and download images to a host for a variety of imaging applications.
Advanced intuitive laser aiming for easy point-and-shoot operation.
The imager uses digital camera technology to take a digital picture of a bar code, stores the resulting
image in its memory and executes state-of-the-art software decoding algorithms to extract the data
from the image.
Aiming the Imager
The mobile computer’s integrated imager projects a laser aiming pattern (shown below) similar to
those used on cameras. The aiming pattern is used to position the bar code or object within the field
of view.
Figure 2-32. Laser Aiming Pattern
Operating
2-47
Operational Modes
Mobile computers with an integrated imager have two modes of operation: Decode Mode and Image
Capture Mode. Both modes are activated by pulling the trigger.
Decode Mode
In this mode, upon pulling the trigger, the Imager attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes
within its field of view. The Imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is pulled, or until a bar
code is decoded.
Image Capture Mode
In this default mode, upon pulling the trigger, the Imager attempts to locate and decode enabled bar
codes within its field of view. The Imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is pulled, or until
a bar code is decoded.
Scanning Considerations
Typically, scanning is a simple matter of aim, scan/decode and a few quick trial efforts master it.
However, two important considerations can be used to optimize any scanning performance:
•
Range
Any scanning device decodes well over a particular working range — minimum and
maximum distances from the bar code. This range varies according to bar code density and
scanning device optics.
Scanning within range brings quick and constant decodes; scanning too close or too far
away prevents decodes. Move the scanner closer and further away to find the right working
range for the bar codes being scanned. However, the situation is complicated by the
availability of various integrated scanning modules. The best way to specify the appropriate
working range per bar code density is through a chart called a decode zone for each scan
module. A decode zone simply plots working range as a function of minimum element widths
of bar code symbols.
•
Angle
Scanning angle is important for promoting quick decodes. When laser beams reflect directly
back into the scanner from the bar code, this specular reflection can “blind” the scanner.
To avoid this, scan the bar code so that the beam does not bounce directly back. But don’t
scan at too sharp an angle; the scanner needs to collect scattered reflections from the scan
to make a successful decode. Practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within.
®
2-48 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Contact the Symbol Support Center if chronic scanning difficulties develop.
Decoding of properly printed bar codes should be quick and effortless.
Note
Scanning Bar Codes
1. Ensure that a scan enabled application is loaded on the mobile computer.
2. Aim the scan exit window at the bar code.
3. Pull the trigger.
• For mobile computers with a laser scanner, ensure the red scan beam covers the entire
bar code. The red scan LED lights to indicate that the laser is on. The green scan LED
lights and an audible beep sounds, by default, to indicate the bar code was decoded
successfully.
Correct
Incorrect
• For mobile computers with an imager, place the bar code in any orientation within the
aiming pattern. Ensure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the
brackets in the aiming pattern. The red laser aiming pattern turns on to assist in aiming.
If necessary, the mobile computer turns on its red LED to illuminate the target bar code.
The green scan LED lights and an audible beep sounds, by default, to indicate the bar
Operating
2-49
code was decoded successfully.
Linear bar code
PDF417 symbol
Symbol
View Finder
(Aiming Pattern)
Correct
Figure 2-33. Bar Code Centered in Aiming Pattern
Incorrect
Correct
Figure 2-34. Bar Code Not Centered in Aiming Pattern
4. Release the trigger.
Imager decoding usually occurs instantaneously. The mobile computer
repeats the steps required to take a digital picture (image) of a poor or
difficult bar code, as long as the trigger remains pulled.
Note
Scanning Tips
Optimal scanning distance varies with bar code density and scanner optics.
•
•
Hold the scanner farther away for larger symbols.
Move the scanner closer for symbols with bars that are close together.
®
2-50 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Scanning procedures depend on the application and mobile computer
configuration. An application may use different scanning procedures from the
one listed above.
Note
Scan LED Indicator
The Indicator LED bar on the mobile computer provides a visual indication of the scan status. See
Figure 1-1 on page 1-3 for the location of the Indicator LED bar.
Table 2-8. Scan LED Indicators
LED Status
Indication
Off
Not scanning.
Solid Red
Laser enabled, scanning/imaging in process.
Successful decode.
Solid Green
Operating
2-51
Resetting the Mobile Computer
If the mobile computer stops responding to input, reset it. There are two reset functions, warm boot
and cold boot. A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs.
A cold boot also restarts the mobile computer, but erases all stored records and entries in RAM. Data
saved in flash memory or a memory card is not lost. In addition it returns formats, preferences and
other settings to the factory default settings.
Perform a warm boot first. This restarts the mobile computer and saves all stored records and entries.
If the mobile computer still does not respond, perform a cold boot.
Performing a Warm Boot
Hold down the Power button for approximately five seconds. As soon as the mobile computer starts
to perform a warm boot release the Power button.
Performing a Cold Boot
A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries that are not
saved in flash memory or a memory card. Never perform a cold boot unless a warm boot does not
solve the problem.
Do not hold down any key, button or the trigger, other than the Power button
during a reset. Performing a cold boot restores formats, preferences and other
settings to the default settings.
Any data previously synchronized with a computer can be restored during the
ActiveSync instructions.
Note
To perform a cold boot:
1. Press and hold the Power button for 15 seconds.
After the first five seconds, the unit starts to perform a warm boot. An on-screen message,
Release pwr key for warm boot. Hold pwr key for cold boot, displays. Continue holding the
Power button and the unit cycles into a cold boot.
1-13) appears for about a minute.
®
2-52 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
screen.
Settings
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 5
Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Personal Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
System Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connections Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Program Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Word Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
®
3-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Sounds & Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Today. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Device ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Copyrights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Root. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Contrast (Monochrome Devices Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Storage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Running Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Settings
3-3
Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Remove Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Wakeups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
®
3-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Settings
3-5
This chapter provides basic instructions for customizing the mobile computer by adjusting settings.
Adjusting Settings
To view available options for the mobile computer settings, tap Start - Settings. You can adjust
settings in either the Personal tab or the System tab.
Personal Tab
Figure 3-1. Settings - Personal Tab
Table 3-1. Personal Tab Applications
Icon
Description
Buttons tab in this window is currently not supported.)
®
3-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 3-2. System Tab Applications (Continued)
Icon
Description
Adjust the contrast on the display (monochrome displays only). See Contrast (Monochrome
Devices Only) on page 3-39 for more information.
information.
information.
Change how numbers, currencies, dates, and times are displayed. See Regional Settings on page
3-47 for more information.
information.
Settings
3-9
Connections Tab
Figure 3-3. Settings - Connections Tab
Table 3-3. System Tab Applications
Icon
Description
Currently not supported.
Currently not supported.
Change connection information. See Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4-
21 for more information.
®
3-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Buttons
Use the Buttons window - Up/Down Control tab to customize Up/Down key control.
Program Buttons
The Program Buttons tab is currently not supported. Refer to the Windows CE Help File for Symbol
Terminals for information about keypad mapping.
Up/Down Control
To set the key repeat rate:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Buttons icon - Up/Down Control tab.
Figure 3-4. Buttons Window - Up/Down Control Tab
2. Adjust the Delay before first repeat: slide bar to change the time elapsed before scrolling
begins.
3. Adjust the Repeat rate slide bar to change the time it takes to scroll from one item to the
next.
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-11
Input
Use the Input window to switch input methods and set input options.
Input Method
To select an input method:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Input icon - Input Method tab.
Figure 3-5. Input Window - Input Method Tab
2. From the Input method: drop-down list, select the input method.
3. Make any additional desired changes to the settings.
4. Tap ok.
®
3-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Word Completion
To adjust how suggested words pop-up in a window above the input panel:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Input icon - Word Completion tab.
Figure 3-6. Input Window - Word Completion Tab
2. Make the desired changes to the settings.
3. Tap ok.
®
3-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Menus
Use Menus window to change the items that appear in the Start menu.
Start Menu
To change the items that appear in the Start menu:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Menus icon - Start Menu tab.
Figure 3-8. Menus Window - Start Menu Tab
2. Select the programs that you want to appear in the Start menu.
3. Tap ok.
You can create subfolders and shortcuts to appear under Start menu. In ActiveSync on the host
computer, click Explore. Double-click My Pocket PC, double-click Windows, double-click Start Menu,
and then create the folders and shortcuts that you want.
Settings
3-15
New Menu
To enable the New menu:
Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Menus icon - New Menu tab.
Figure 3-9. Menus Window - New Menu Tab
1. Select the Turn on the New button menu check box.
2. Select the items to appear on the menu.
An arrow appears next to New in the command bar of certain programs such as Pocket
Word, Pocket Excel, Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks. You can tap this arrow and then tap a
new item to create.
3. Tap ok.
®
3-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Owner Information
Use the Owner Information window to enter information about the owner. The information can be
displayed when the mobile computer is turned on.
Identification
To enter personal information:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Owner Information icon - Identification tab.
Figure 3-10. Owner Information Window - Identification Tab
2. Fill in or edit the data as desired.
3. To have this information display when you start the mobile computer, select the Show
information when device is turned on check box.
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-17
Notes
To add more information about the owner:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Owner Information icon - Notes tab.
Figure 3-11. Owner Information Window - Notes Tab
2. Enter information in the Notes: box.
3. To have this information display when you start the mobile computer, select the Show
information when device is turned on check box.
4. Tap ok.
®
3-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
After the information is entered and the Show information when device is turned on check
boxes are selected, the Welcome window appears whenever the mobile computer is
powered on. Tap the screen with the stylus to exit the Welcome window.
Figure 3-12. Welcome Window
Settings
3-19
Passwords
Use the Password window to set a password to disable unauthorized access to the mobile computer.
Password
If the device is configured to connect to a network, use a strong (difficult to figure out) password to
help protect network security. Password cracking tools continue to improve and the computers used
to crack passwords are more powerful than ever.
If you forget the password, or if the mobile computer has become corrupted
and soft resetting doesn't work, you must perform a cold boot. Performing a
cold boot erases all files and data that you have created, and programs you
have installed.
CAUTION
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Password icon - Password tab.
Figure 3-13. Password Window - Password Tab
2. Select Prompt if device unused for check box to enable password protection.
3. From the drop down list, select a time value for the protection to take affect after non-use.
4. Select either Simple 4 digit password or Strong alphanumeric password radio button to set
a password.
5. For a simple password, In the Password field, enter a four digit password.
6. For a stronger password:
®
3-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
a. In the Password: field, enter a seven character password. A strong password must
contain at least seven characters that are a combination of uppercase and lowercase
letters, numerals, and punctuation.
Figure 3-14. Alphanumeric Password
b. In the Confirm: field, re-enter the password.
7. Tap ok.
®
3-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Sounds & Notifications
Use the Sounds & Notifications window to set event sounds and volume options.
Volume
To adjust the system volume and enable event sounds:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Sounds & Notifications icon - Volume tab.
Figure 3-16. Sounds & Notifications Window - Volume Tab
2. Use the slide bar to change the system volume.
3. Select the desired Enable Sound options.
Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life.
Note
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-23
Notifications
On the Notifications tab, you can customize how you are notified about different events.
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Sounds & Notifications icon - Notifications tab.
Figure 3-17. Sounds & Notifications Window - Notifications Tab
2. Select the event name from the Select an event list drop-down list.
3. Select the Play sound check box to enable the sound notification.
4. Select a sound from the drop-down list.
5. Tap ok.
®
3-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Today
Use the Today window to customize the Today screen.
Appearance
To change the appearance of the Today screen:
1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Today icon - Appearance tab.
Figure 3-18. Today Window - Appearance Tab
2. Select the desired theme for the Today screen background. To use your own background,
select Use this picture as the background check box and tap Browse to locate the desired
file on the mobile computer.
3. To beam a theme to another mobile computer, select the desired theme and tap Beam.
4. To delete a theme, select the desired theme and tap Delete.
5. Tap ok.
Settings
3-25
Items
To select items that appear on the Today screen:
1. Tap Start - Settings Personal tab - Today icon - Appearance tab.
Figure 3-19. Today Window - Items Tab
2. Select the items you want to appear on the Today screen. To customize the information
further, select an information type, and then tap Options (not available for all information
types).
3. Tap ok.
®
3-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
About
Use the About window to view general system properties, change memory settings, input device
name and view copyright information.
Version
The Version tab view displays general system settings:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - About icon - Version tab.
Figure 3-20. About Window - Version Tab
2. Tap ok.
Settings
3-27
Device ID
The Device ID tab allows you to customize the name and description of the mobile computer:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - About icon - Device ID tab.
Figure 3-21. About Window - Device ID Tab
2. In the Device name: field, enter a name for the mobile computer. Ensure that you do not use
spaces.
3. In the Description: field, enter a description for the mobile computer.
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-29
Backlight
Use the Backlight window to conserve battery power, to turn off the backlight when the mobile
computer is idle and to adjust the brightness level. You also have options to turn on the backlight
when you tap the screen or press a key.
Battery Power
To set the backlight settings when using battery power:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Backlight icon - Battery Power tab.
Figure 3-23. Backlight Window - Battery Power Tab
3. Tap ok.
When you perform a cold boot all settings selected in this view return to the
default settings. The settings are maintained after a warm boot.
Note
®
3-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 3-4. Battery Power Backlight Settings
Status
Conditions of light On/Off
Default (Cold Boot)
On Battery Power
Select the Turn off backlight if device is not used Check box is selected.
for check box to turn off the backlight after a
certain period of time has passed unused. Period
of time can be selected from the list. Available
timings are 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min,
4 min and 5 min.
Default time is one minute.
Check Box is selected.
Select the Turn on backlight when a button is
pressed or the screen is tapped check box to turn
on the backlight when a key is pressed or the
screen is tapped.
Note
Settings
3-31
External Power
To set the backlight settings when using external AC power:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Backlight icon - External Power tab.
Figure 3-24. Backlight Window - External Power Tab
3. Tap ok.
Table 3-5. External Power Backlight Settings
Status
Conditions of light On/Off
Default (Cold Boot)
On External
Power
Select the Turn off backlight if device is not used for
check box to turn off the backlight after a certain
period of time has passed unused. Period of time can
be selected from the list. Available timings are 1
min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min, 7 min, 8 min,
9 min and 10 min.
Check Box is not selected.
Default time is one minute.
Select the Turn on backlight when a button is
pressed or the screen is tapped check box to turn on
the backlight when a key is pressed or the screen is
tapped.
Check Box is selected.
®
3-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Brightness
To set the screen’s brightness level:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Backlight icon - Brightness tab.
Figure 3-25. Backlight Window - Brightness Tab
2. Select the Turn off backlight check box to cancel the touch screen’s backlight feature.
or
Use the stylus to drag the brightness control to the desired brightness level.
3. Tap ok.
When you perform a cold boot all settings selected in this view return to the
default settings. The settings are maintained after a warm boot.
Note
Settings
3-33
Certificates
On the mobile computer you can add and delete public key certificates. These certificates help
establish your identity when you are logging onto a secured network, such as a corporate network.
Certificates also help establish the identity of other computers, such as servers, with which you
connect. This helps prevent unauthorized users from accessing the mobile computer and information.
You can store two types of certificates on the mobile computer: personal certificates that establish
your identity, and root certificates that establish the identity of servers with which you connect. The
mobile computer may include a set of pre installed certificates. For information about viewing and
deleting certificates, see the sections below.
Personal
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Certificates icon - Personal tab.
Figure 3-26. Certificates Window - Personal Tab
The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.
2. To view more information about a certificate, select it from the list box.
3. To delete a certificate, tap and hold it in the list box, and then tap Delete.
4. Tap ok.
®
3-34 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Root
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Certificates icon - Root tab.
Figure 3-27. Certificates Window - Root Tab
The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.
2. To view more information about a certificate, select it from the list box.
3. To delete a certificate, tap and hold it in the list box, and then tap Delete.
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-35
Clock
Use the Clock window to change the date, time, time zone and set alarms.
Time
To set the date, time and time zone:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Clock icon - Time tab.
Figure 3-28. Clock Window - Time Tab
2. Select the Home radio button.
3. Select the current time zone from the time zone drop-down list.
4. To set the hour:
a. Tap on the hour field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust
the hour.
or
b. On the clock face, tap and drag the hour hand to the current hour.
5. To set the minutes:
a. tap on the minute field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust
the minutes
or
b. On the clock face, tap and drag the minute hand to the current minutes.
®
3-36 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
6. To set the date, tap in the date field.
7. Tap the down arrow to the right of the date field. The calendar appears.
Figure 3-29. Calendar
8. To select the month and year, tap the arrows to the right or left of the month until the current
month displays.
9. Tap the day of the month. The calendar disappears.
10. Tap ok.
If you visit a particular time zone often, set it as your Visiting time zone so that you can quickly see
the correct date and time.
A clock displays on the Navigation bar. To view the current date and time, tap the Time icon to see
Figure 3-30. Time and Next Appointment Message
To switch from analog to digital clock display, tap and hold the Time icon. Select Analog or Digital.
Settings
3-37
Alarms
You can use the mobile computer as a travel alarm clock by setting a wake-up alarm.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Clock icon - Alarms tab.
Figure 3-31. Clock Window - Alarms Tab
2. In the Description field, enter a name for the alarm.
3. Tap the letter(s) representing the day(s) of the week that the alarm be enabled.
4. Tap the bell icon to set alarm features. The alarm settings window appears.
Figure 3-32. Alarm Settings Window
®
3-38 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
5. Select the Play sound check box to enable a sound when the alarm starts.
6. From the drop-down list, select the sound that plays when the alarm goes off.
7. Select Repeat sound check box to repeat the sound notification.
8. Select Display message check box to enable a message to appear on the screen when the
alarm goes off.
9. Tap ok.
10. Tap the time field to set the alarm time. The clock window appears.
Figure 3-33. Alarm Clock Setting Window
11. Use the time field and arrow buttons to set the time.
12. Tap ok.
13. Set up to three more alarms.
14. Tap ok.
Settings
3-39
Contrast (Monochrome Devices Only)
Use the Contrast window to change the date, time, time zone and set alarms.
To adjust the contrast on the display:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Contrast icon.
Figure 3-34. Contrast Window
2. Use the stylus to drag the slider to adjust the contrast on the screen.
3. Tap ok to exit.
®
3-40 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Memory
Use the Memory window to adjust RAM allocation, view storage card memory usage and stop active
programs.
Main
To temporarily adjust the allocation of storage and program memory:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Memory icon - Main tab.
Figure 3-35. Memory Window - Main Tab
2. To adjust RAM allocation move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage.
If you don't have enough space for a file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the
mobile computer is running slowly, try increasing the amount of program memory.
3. Tap ok.
Resetting the mobile computer can make additional storage or program
memory available. If you continue to experience memory problems, reset the
mobile computer.
Note
Programs supplied with the mobile computer are located in ROM and remain after a cold boot.
Programs you install are located in RAM and need to be reinstalled after a cold boot. If you have
trouble reinstalling programs, adjust RAM allocation.
Settings
3-41
Storage Card
The Storage Card tab displays how much memory is available in a partition in the mobile computer.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Memory icon - Storage Card tab.
Figure 3-36. Memory Window - Storage Card Tab
2. Tap the drop-down list and then the name of the storage card or Flash File partition whose
information you want to view. Minimally, the drop-down list always includes the Platform
and Application partition.
3. Tap ok.
®
3-42 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Running Programs
The Running Programs tab displays the list of currently active programs.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Memory icon - Running Programs tab.
Figure 3-37. Memory Window - Running Programs Tab
The Running Program List: lists all running (active) programs.
2. To stop an active program, select the program from the Running Program List: list and tap
Stop.
3. To display an active program, select the program from the Running Program List: list box and
tap Activate.
4. To stop all active programs tap Stop All.
5. Tap ok.
Settings
3-43
Power
Use the Power window to view the status of the main and backup batteries and set power
management options.
Battery
To check the main battery and backup battery status:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Power icon - Battery tab.
Figure 3-38. Power Window - Battery Tab
The Battery tab provides general information about battery conditions. The amount of useful
operating time remaining varies depending on battery type and how you use the mobile
computer.
2. Tap ok.
®
3-44 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Wireless
To turn the mobile computer's wireless capabilities on and off:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Power icon - Wireless tab.
Figure 3-39. Power Window - Wireless Tab
2. In the list box, select the wireless device check box.
3. Select Wireless signals off radio button or Wireless signals on radio button.
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-45
Advanced
You can select options for turning off the mobile computer to conserve battery power. To conserve the
most power, select the option to turn off the device after 3 minutes or less.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Power icon - Advanced tab.
Figure 3-40. Power Window - Advanced Tab
2. Select On battery power: Turn off device if not used for check box.
3. Select time value from the drop-down list.
4. Select On external power: Turn off device if not used for check box.
5. Select time value from the drop-down list.
6. Tap ok.
Optimizing Battery Life
You want the batteries to last as long as possible, especially when you're on the road. Under normal
conditions, you can get many hours of use from a single charge. Here are a few tips to help you get
the most of the battery:
•
Use external power whenever possible, especially when:
• Using the backlight.
• Connecting to a host computer.
• Using accessories.
®
3-46 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
•
•
Set the mobile computer to turn off when idle. While on battery power, the mobile computer
automatically turns off, or suspends operation, if you don't touch the keyboard or use the
stylus for three minutes. Maximize battery life by shortening this time.
Turn off sounds you don't need. By default, the mobile computer produces sounds in
response to a number of events, such as warnings, appointments, and key presses. To
optimize battery life, turn off any sounds you don't need. See Sounds & Notifications on
page 3-22 for instructions.
When batteries are low, a battery icon appears in the Navigation bar. See
Status Icons on page 2-25 for more information.
Note
Settings
3-47
Regional Settings
With regional settings, you can change the way the mobile computer displays dates, times, currency
amounts, large numbers, and numbers with decimal fractions. You can also choose the metric or U.S.
system of measurement.
You can also choose from a large number of input locales. When you switch to another input locale,
some programs offer special features, such as font characters or spell checkers designed for different
languages.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Regional Settings icon - Region tab.
Figure 3-41. Regional Settings Window - Region Tab
2. From the drop-down list, select the country in which you are currently located.
®
3-48 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
3. Select the Number tab.
Figure 3-42. Regional Settings Window - Number Tab
4. Select the desired options. The characteristics available are determined by the region
selected on the Region tab.
5. Select the Currency tab.
Figure 3-43. Regional Settings Window - Currency Tab
6. Select the desired options. The characteristics available are determined by the region
selected on the Regional tab.
Settings
3-49
7. Select the Time tab.
Figure 3-44. Regional Settings Window - Time Tab
8. Select the desired options. The characteristics available are determined by the region
selected on the Region tab.
9. Select the Date tab.
Figure 3-45. Regional Settings Window - Date Tab
10. Select the desired options. The characteristics available are determined by the region
selected on the Region tab.
11. Tap ok.
®
3-50 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Remove Programs
Use the Remove Programs window to remove programs that were loaded onto the mobile computer:
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Remove Programs icon.
Figure 3-46. Remove Programs Window
2. From the Programs in storage memory: list box, select the program you want to remove.
3. Tap Remove.
You can only remove programs that you have installed in RAM.
Note
4. Tap ok.
Settings
3-51
Screen
Use the Screen window to align the screen and to enable ClearType fonts.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Screen icon.
Figure 3-47. Screen Window
2. Tap Align Screen.
3. The align screen appears. Tap each target with the stylus and following the on-screen
messages.
4. Select the Enable ClearType check box to enable easier reading of text in programs that
support ClearType.
5. Tap ok.
®
3-52 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Symbol Settings
Use the Symbol Settings window to set specific settings for the mobile computer.
Wakeups
The mobile computer can be configured to wakeup from sleep mode.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Symbol Settings icon - Wakeups tab.
Figure 3-48. Symbol Settings Window - Wakeups Tab
2. Select the Trigger, Any Key and/or Touch Panel check box in the Power Off or Auto Off list
3. Tap ok.
Only the default (Trigger and Any Key) wakeup condition settings are retained
after a cold boot. However, all settings are maintained after a warm boot.
Note
Table 3-6. Wakeup Conditions
Status
Description
Action
Conditions for wakeup
Trigger button is pressed.
Power Off
When the mobile computer goes into Trigger
sleep mode by pressing the Power
button, these actions wake the
mobile computer up.
Any Key
Any key on the keypad is pressed.
Touch screen is tapped.
Touch Panel
Settings
3-53
Table 3-6. Wakeup Conditions (Continued)
Status
Description
Action
Conditions for wakeup
Trigger button is pressed.
Auto Off
When the mobile computer goes into Trigger
sleep mode by an automatic power-
off function, these actions wake the
mobile computer up.
Any Key
Any key on the keypad is pressed.
Touch screen is tapped.
Touch Panel
System
The System tab displays mobile computer system data.
1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Symbol Settings icon - System tab.
Figure 3-49. Symbol Setting Window - System Tab
Table 3-7. System Tab Data
Item
Description
Format
DEVICE ID in
GUID format
128-bit unique identifier guaranteed
across all mobile computers with
Windows Mobile 2003 Software for
GUID is a Microsoft defined format.
®
Pocket PCs.
®
3-54 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 3-7. System Tab Data
Item
Description
Format
DEVICE ID in
Byte format
128-bit unique identifier guaranteed
across all mobile computers with
Windows Mobile 2003 Software for
Byte order
®
Pocket PCs
OEM Name
IPL Version
OEM Version
Name of manufacturer’s device.
XXXXXX
(where X is an alphanumeric character)
Version of IPL.
X.XX
(where X is an alphanumeric character)
Manufacturer’s version.
X.XX
(where X is an alphanumeric character)
Platform Name Platform and Version of Platform.
and Version
PocketPC 3.0, SSDK 4.2
Platform ID
Version of platform hex image.
XXXXXX
(where X is an alphanumeric character)
3. Tap ok.
®
3-56 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Connections
Use the Configure Network Adapters window to modify IP and server addresses for a wireless
Ethernet connection.
Wireless Ethernet
The mobile computer can be configured for a wireless Ethernet connection.
1. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Wireless Ethernet icon. The Configure Network
Adapters window appears.
Figure 3-51. Configure Network Adapters Window
2. In the My network card connects to: drop-down list, select the appropriate connection.
Settings
3-57
3. In the Tap an adapter to modify settings: list, select the adapter to modify. The IP address
window displays.
Figure 3-52. Wireless Ethernet - IP Address Window
4. In the IP address window, select the appropriate radio button:
• to Use a server-assigned IP address
or
• to Use a specific IP address.
If Use a specific IP address is selected, enter the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default
gateway, as needed.
5. Tap the Name Servers tab. The Name Servers window appears.
Figure 3-53. Wireless Ethernet - Name Servers Window
®
3-58 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
6. Enter the appropriate DNS, Alt DNS, WINS, and Alt WINS server addresses.
7. Tap ok.
8. Tap ok to confirm the setup.
9. Tap ok to exit.
Communications
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3
Installing Communication Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Installing ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Setting up a Partnership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Serial Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Ethernet Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Installing eConnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Cradle Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Using ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
®
4-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Communications
4-3
Introduction
The mobile computer is capable of communicating with a number of hosts, including development
computers, serial devices, printers, etc. The available accessories serve as essential data
communication devices, enabling the information to be synchronized on the mobile computer with the
information on the host device using ActiveSync. With the appropriate accessory and software, the
mobile computer can establish a number of connection types, such as a serial connection, a USB
connection and an Ethernet connection.
For an Ethernet connection, use the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle.
For a serial or USB connection, use one of the accessories listed below.
•
•
•
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle
Cable Adapter Module (CAM)
Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR).
This chapter provides information on installing the appropriate communication software and setting
up the appropriate accessory to enable communication between the mobile computer and the host
device. For more information about the accessories available for the mobile computer, see Chapter 8,
Installing Communication Software
To successfully communicate with the various host devices Microsoft ActiveSync (version 3.7 or
higher) must be installed on the host computer.
Installing ActiveSync
Use ActiveSync (version 3.7 or higher) to synchronize the information on the mobile computer with
the information on the host computer. Changes made on the mobile computer or host computer
appear in both places after synchronization.
ActiveSync software:
•
•
Allows the user to work with mobile computer-compatible host applications on the host
computer. ActiveSync replicates data from the mobile computer so data can be viewed,
entered and modified on the mobile computer with the host application.
Synchronize files between the mobile computer and host computer. The files are
automatically converted to the correct format.
®
4-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
•
Back up the data stored on the mobile computer. Synchronization is a one-step procedure
that ensures the data is always safe and up-to-date.
•
•
Copy (rather than synchronize) files between the mobile computer and host computer.
Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode, e.g., set to
synchronize continually while the mobile computer is connected to the host computer, or set
to only synchronize on command.
•
Select the types of information to synchronize and control how much data is synchronized.
To install ActiveSync on the host computer:
1. Download the latest version of the software from the Microsoft web site at
http://www.microsoft.com. Refer to the installation and RAS instructions included with the
ActiveSync software.
2. Set up a partnership via the ActiveSync connection using a serial or USB connection to the
host computer.
Microsoft recommends installing ActiveSync on the host computer before connecting the
mobile computer.
Note
Setting up a Partnership
After ActiveSync installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps the user to connect the
mobile computer to the host computer, set up a partnership to synchronize information between the
mobile computer and host computer and customize synchronization settings.
Before setting up a partnership between the mobile computer and host computer, refer to the
communication setup sections in this chapter for detailed information about Serial, USB and Ethernet
communication setups.
Communications
4-5
To set up a partnership:
1. If the Get Connected window does not appear on the host computer, select Start - Programs
- Microsoft ActiveSync - File - Get Connected.
Figure 4-1. Get Connected Window
2. Connect the mobile computer to the host computer using the appropriate Serial connection
3. On the host computer, select Next in the Get Connected window.
®
4-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
4. The host computer and the mobile computer attempt to synchronize. The New Partnership
window appears.
Figure 4-2. New Partnership Window
5. Click the Standard partnership radio button and then select Next. The New Partnership/
Specify how to synchronize data window appears.
Figure 4-3. How To Sync Window
Communications
4-7
6. Click the Synchronize with this desktop computer radio button and select Next. The New
Partnership/Select Number of Partnerships window appears.
Figure 4-4. How To Sync Window
7. Click the Yes, I want to synchronize with only this computer radio button and then select
Next. The New Partnership/Select Synchronization Settings window appears.
Figure 4-5. Select Synchronization Settings Window
8. To synchronize a particular type of information, select its check box. To stop synchronization
of that information, clear its check box.
®
4-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
9. Select Next. The New Partnership/Setup Complete window appears.
Figure 4-6. Setup Complete Window
10. Select Finish. The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears showing the connection status
and the data synchronized.
Figure 4-7. ActiveSync Connected Window
During the first synchronization, information stored on the host computer is copied to the mobile
computer. When the copy is complete and all data is synchronized, the mobile computer can be
disconnected from the host computer.
Communications
4-9
The first ActiveSync operation must be performed with a local, direct
connection.
To retain partnerships after a cold boot, capture partnership registry
information in a .reg file and save it in the Flash File System. See the
Windows CE Help File for Symbol Terminals for details.
Note
For more information about using ActiveSync, start ActiveSync on the host computer and see
ActiveSync Help.
Serial Communication Setup
For serial communication using accessories that can communicate with
either a serial or USB connection, connect only the serial cable. Do not
connect both the serial and USB cables. If both serial and USB
Note
communication cables are required, the host computer’s USB port must be
disabled in ActiveSync before serial communication can be enabled.
Setting Up a Connection on the Mobile Computer
1. On the mobile computer tap Start - ActiveSync to display the ActiveSync window.
Figure 4-8. ActiveSync Window
®
4-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. Tap Tools - Options on the ActiveSync window to display the PC Synchronization window -
PC tab.
Figure 4-9. PC Synchronization Window -PC Tab
3. Tap Options to display the PC Synchronization Options window.
Figure 4-10. PC Synchronization Options Window
4. Select the Enable PC sync using this connection: check box.
5. Select the connection (e.g., serial COM port, USB) for synchronization from the drop-down
list. The default connection for synchronization is USB.
6. Select the Maintain connection radio button.
Communications
4-11
7. Tap ok to exit the PC Synchronization Options window and tap ok to exit the PC
Synchronization window.
8. Ensure that ActiveSync is installed on the host computer and a partnership was created. See
Setting Up a Connection on the Host Computer
1. Select Start - Programs - Microsoft ActiveSync on the host computer, if it is not already
running. The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears.
Figure 4-11. ActiveSync - Not Connected
Every terminal should have a unique device name. Never try to synchronize
instructions on changing the device name.
Note
®
4-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. In the ActiveSync window, select File - Connection Settings. The Connection Settings
window appears.
Figure 4-12. Connection Settings Window
3. In the Connection Settings window, select the appropriate check box for the type of
connection being used. If using a serial connection, select the COM port from the drop-down
list.
If serial, USB and Ethernet communication connections are used, all check
boxes can be selected to avoid having to update this window for different
connections. However, if the same serial COM port is used for ActiveSync
Note
and TCM, the serial COM port must be deselected in this window for it to be
available for TCM downloads.
4. Select the Show status icon in taskbar check box
5. Tap OK to save any changes made.
6. Ensure the accessory being used to communicate is connected to the host computer and the
The accessory requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a port with any other
device. Refer to the host computer user manual supplied to locate the USB
ports.
Note
Communications
4-13
7. Connect the mobile computer to the accessory being used for communication.
8. Power on the mobile computer.
9. If a partnership was already created between the host computer and mobile computer,
synchronization occurs automatically upon connection.
Ethernet Communication Setup
To establish a connection between the mobile computer and the host computer to communicate over
an Ethernet network, perform the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Install MobileDox Cradle Manager
Install eConnect
Mobile computer configuration
Host computer configuration
DHCP server configuration
Cradle configuration.
Installing MobileDox Cradle Manager
MobileDox Cradle Manager is used only when establishing a connection
using the Four Slot Ethernet cradle.
Note
The Cradle Management software features:
•
•
•
View cradles that are attached to the network via MobileDox Net
View cradle status
Modify cradle settings including:
• IP address settings
• DNS and WINS settings
• Identification settings
• USB port specific settings
•
•
Restart cradles connected to the network via MobileDox Net
Update the firmware of MobileDox Net.
®
4-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
To install the Cradle Management Software on the host computer, download the latest version of the
Installing eConnect
eConnect is used only when establishing a connection using the Four Slot
Ethernet cradle.
Note
To install eConnect on the mobile computer:
page 4-3). Ensure a partnership was established between the host computer and the mobile
the host computer.
3. On the host computer, display the ActiveSync Explorer and copy the .cab file to the My
Pocket PC Temp folder.
4. On the mobile computer, locate the .cab file in the File Explorer Temp folder.
5. Tap the eConnect .cab file once to install eConnect.
6. The .cab file is removed from the File Explorer Temp folder automatically when the
installation is complete.
7. Tap X to close File Explorer.
8. Warm boot the mobile computer to add the eConnect icon to the Settings - System tab.
eConnect is reinstalled automatically after a cold boot.
Note
Communications
4-15
9. On the mobile computer tap Start - Settings - System tab and tap the eConnect icon to
display the Settings - eConnect window.
Figure 4-13. Settings Windows
10. Confirm that the Serial Port Baud Rate: value is set to USB. If it is not set to USB then use
the drop-down menu and tap USB.
11. Tap ok to exit the Settings- eConnect window and tap X to exit the Settings window.
Host Computer Configuration
The host computer must be setup with the appropriate communication software and connection
settings. Follow the steps below using Microsoft ActiveSync software on both the mobile computer
and the host computer.
To configure the host computer:
2. Configure the connection settings. The host computer must be configured for TCP/IP
network communications.
a. Click the ActiveSync icon
b. Click on File - Connection settings
c. In the Connection settings dialog box, select the Allow Network (Ethernet) and Remote
Access Service (RAS) server connection with this desktop computer option.
Other options may be selected, for example, Allow serial cable or infrared connection to
this COM port.
®
4-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
3. Click OK.
Before communicating through an Ethernet connection, create a partnership
between the mobile computer and the host computer via a USB connection.
Note
DHCP Server Configuration
If you use a DHCP server to distribute IP addresses and other network parameters, the server setup
should include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
IP address pool (1 or 5 IP address per cradle)
Router/gateway address
One or more DNS server addresses
One or more WINS server addresses
Subnet mask.
To assign the initial cradle IP address, you can either use a DHCP server, as
shown above, or use the MobileDox Cradle Manager (see Installing
MobileDox Cradle Manager on page 4-13). The DHCP server is the preferred
method.
Note
Cradle Configuration
The MobileDox Cradle Manager allows you to setup the Device IP Address and modify cradle
install the software.
Setting the Device IP Address
By default, the cradle uses DHCP to obtain its IP address. However, if DHCP fails, the Cradle Manager
can assign an IP address.
This is used if the cradle is connected to the network, but fails to appear in
MobileDox. Enter the hardware device (MAC) address to locate the cradle
and assign it a new IP address.
Note
Communications
4-17
To set the IP address:
1. Launch the MobileDox Cradle Manager on the host computer.
2. Click File - Set IP Address of Unlisted Device. The Set IP Address window appears:
Figure 4-14. Set IP Address Window
3. Enter the appropriate MAC Address and IP address.
4. Click OK.
®
4-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Modifying Cradle Settings
1. Launch the MobileDox Cradle Manager on the host computer.
2. Select the name of the cradle you want to configure from the list.
3. Click Device - Modify Settings.
4. Use the General Settings tab to modify the identification settings of the cradle.
Field
Description
Device Name
A text string used to describe the
MobileDox device. Any 15-character
string may be entered.
Custom String
A text string for any desired usage
(examples are: location, asset ID, etc.).
Any 15-character string may be
entered.
Require Admin
Privileges to Modify
Settings check box
Selecting this check box requires users
to have administrative privileges in
order to modify MobileDox settings.
Administrative privileges are validated
using standard Windows
authentication.
Figure 4-15. Cradle Settings Window - General Settings Tab
Communications
4-19
5. Use the TPC/IP Settings tab to modify the DNS and WINS identification settings of the
cradle.
Field
Use DHCP
Description
If check box is selected, necessary
information is retrieved from the DHCP
server.
If check box is not selected, static
configuration is used (information needs
to be entered).
IP Address
The IP address that the MobileDox uses
when communicating on the network.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask that the MobileDox
uses when communicating on the
network.
Gateway Address
DNS Address
The IP address that the MobileDox uses
to send non-local IP network data.
The IP address of a server(s) that can
resolve Internet names into IP
addresses.
WINS Address
The IP address of a server(s) that can
resolve Windows network names into IP
addresses.
This field must be populated correctly
when using ActiveSync.
Figure 4-16. Cradle Settings Window - TCP/IP Settings Tab
®
4-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
6. Use the Port Settings tab to modify the USB port settings of the cradle.
Field
Port Name
Description
A text string used to describe the device
attached to the port. Any 15-character
string can be entered.
You can specify up to four port names,
one for each of the cradle’s slots.
IP Address
The IP address assigned to the cradled
device. There should be one IP address
per cradle slot. This box is disabled for all
devices if DHCP is used to obtain the IP
address.
Use DHCP to obtain The cradle uses DHCP to obtain an IP
IP Address check
address for the handheld.
box
Unchecking this selection allows the
cradle to use Static IP address for the
handheld.
Use NAT check box The cradle uses Network Address
Translation (NAT) when forwarding
handheld traffic onto the network. No IP
addresses are necessary for the
handhelds.
This must be disable when using
ActiveSync.
Figure 4-17. Cradle Settings Window - Port Settings Tab
7. Click OK.
Using ActiveSync
1. Review the configuration of the cradle using the MobileDox Cradle Manager.
a. A WIN server must be present on your network. Ensure that the WINS Address provided
in the TCP/IP Settings tab matches the IP address of the WIN server on your network.
b. Ensure that the Use NAT check box is not selected in the Port Settings tab.
2. Insert the mobile computer into the cradle. The mobile computer displays a succession of
dialog boxes appear, indicating the status of the connection. Also the ActiveSync icon on the
host computer’s system tray turns green to indicate that the host computer and the mobile
computer are communicating.
Communications
4-21
Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network
The MC9010-G and MC9050-G can connect to the Internet across a wireless network. To set up a
wireless connection:
1. Tap the Mobile Companion icon on the task tray. The Mobile Companion menu appears.
Mobile
Companion Menu
Mobile
Companion Icon
Figure 4-18. Mobile Companion Menu
2. Tap Find WLANs. The Mobile Companion window appears.
Figure 4-19. Mobile Companion Window
3. The terminal tries to locate Access Points (APs) in the area. When it locates a wireless
LAN(s), the ESSID name displays in the Available WLAN Networks list.
4. Tap the ESSID name and then tap Connect.
®
4-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
5. The Mobile Companion Mode tab appears.
Figure 4-20. Mobile Companion - Mode Tab
6. The profile name and ESSID name appears in the respective fields.
7. In the Operating Mode: list, select Infrastructure.
8. Tap the Encryption tab.
Figure 4-21. Mobile Companion - Encryption Tab
9. Select the encryption algorithm used on the wireless network (Open System, 40-bit Shared
Key, 128-bit Shared Key or Kerberos).
If you select 40-bit Shared Key, 128-bit Shared Key or Kerberos, enter the required data in
the fields that appear in the window. See the network administrator for this information.
Communications
4-23
10. Tap the IP Config tab.
Figure 4-22. Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (DHCP)
11. Select either DHCP or Static from the IP Type drop-down list.
12. If you select Static IP, enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window. See
your network administrator for this information.
13. Tap ok.
14. Tap ok.
15. The Mobile Companion wireless status icon should indicate that the terminal is connected
to the AP. If the status icon does not indicate that the terminal is connected to the AP, see
your network administrator.
16. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon - Advanced tab.
Figure 4-23. Connections Window - Advanced Tab
®
4-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
17. Tap Network Card. The Configure Network Adapters window appears.
Figure 4-24. Configure Network Adapters Window
18. Select The Internet from the My network card connects to: drop-down list.
19. Select 802.11b Wireless LAN from the Tap an adapter to notify settings: list box. The
802.11b Wireless LAN window appears.
Figure 4-25. 802.11b Wireless LAN Window
Communications
4-25
20. Tap ok. A notification window appears indicating that the next time the adapter (radio card)
is used it will have the new settings.
Figure 4-26. Adapters Message Window
21. Tap ok.
22. Tap ok.
23. Tap ok.
24. Tap Start - Programs - Internet Explorer. The Pocket Internet Explorer window appears.
Figure 4-27. Pocket Internet Explorer Window
25. In the address bar, enter the URL for a web site.
®
4-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Spectrum24 Configuration
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3
Mobile Companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Finding WLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Setting Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Changing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Editing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Creating a New Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Ordering Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Sample Spectrum24DS .Reg File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
®
5-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-3
Wireless LANs allow mobile computers to communicate wirelessly, and to send captured data “real
time” to a host device. Before a mobile computer can be used on a Spectrum24 LAN, your facility must
be set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and the mobile computer must be
properly configured. Refer to the documentation that came with your Access Points (APs) for
instructions on setting up the required hardware.
The mobile computer Network Adapter settings and Spectrum24 settings configure and monitor the
wireless connection. The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray, and indicates mobile
computer signal strength as follows:
Icon
Status
Excellent signal strength
Very good signal strength
Good signal strength
Fair signal strength
Poor signal strength
Out-of-network range (not associated)
Mobile Companion
The Mobile Companion utility is used to configure the mobile computer’s wireless network settings.
The Mobile Companion utility starts automatically and appears as an icon on the task tray. The status
®
5-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
icon changes in real-time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless
network. Tap the icon on the task tray to open the Mobile Companion menu.
Mobile
Companion Menu
Mobile
Companion Icon
Figure 5-1. Mobile Companion Menu
When the menu opens, select Status, WLAN Profiles, Find WLANs or Options from menu.
Table 5-1. Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions
Menu Item
Status
Description
Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection.
Signal tab view - displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter (using its
current profile) to the associated AP.
Info tab view - displays software, driver, firmware, hardware, and country information for
the current profile.
IP Status tab view - displays network address information.
Ping tab view - displays signal strength data, data rate, and conduct data transmission
tests between the mobile computer and associated AP or client.
Status (Cont’d)
WLAN Profiles
APs tab view - displays APs with the same ESSID as the current mobile computer profile.
The mobile computer's roaming capabilities can be set from this tab. When not in Ad Hoc
operating mode, the APs tab displays instead of the Peers tab.
Peers tab view - displays the BSSIDs, power modes, transmit rates and data rates of other
networked clients within the Ad Hoc (peer-to-peer) network. When in Ad Hoc operating
mode, the Peers tab view displays instead of the APs tab.
Displays the current profiles and allows the user to add, edit and delete profiles.
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-5
Table 5-1. Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions (Continued)
Menu Item
Find WLANs
Description
Displays a list of Spectrum24 networks (APs and networked peers) available to the mobile
computer for association. The networks are listed by their ESSID. To the right of each
network is a signal strength icon. Networks with a signal strength of Good (three green
bars out of five) or better should be considered for connection. Tap a network and tap
Connect to interoperate with the AP representing that network. Once connected, the
Mode, Encryption, IP Config and Power tab views display the ESSID, security settings,
network address information and power consumption level set for that network. See
Finding WLANs on page 5-5 for more information.
Options
Displays settings for configuring battery consumption avoidance capabilities, system
sounds, AP and mobile computer association capabilities, profile roaming options, as well
as the password protecting the Mobile Companion utility.
Finding WLANs
A completed profile is a set of mobile computer configuration settings that can be used in different
locations to connect to a Spectrum24 network. Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre-
defined mobile computer operating parameters available for use in various Spectrum24 network
environments.
Select Find WLANs from the Mobile Companion menu to locate the APs in the area. The Mobile
Companion window displays the available WLAN networks.
Figure 5-2. Available WLAN Networks
1. Select an available WLAN network from the list box.
®
5-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. Tap Connect. The Mode tab appears.
Ad Hoc Mode
Infrastructure Mode
Figure 5-3. Mode Tab
3. The Profile Name: and 802.11 ESSID: fields are populated with the name and (WLAN)
identifier of the network connection. You can change the Profile Name: if desired.
Use the Profile Name field to enter the name of the mobile computer profile used to transmit
with either an AP or another networked computer.
The ESSID is the 802.11 Extended Service Set Identifier. The ESSID is 32-character
(maximum) string identifying the WLAN. The ESSID assigned to the mobile computer is
required to match the AP ESSID for the mobile computer to communicate with the AP.
4. Select the operating mode from the Operating Mode: drop-down list:
Infrastructure
Select Infrastructure to enable the mobile computer to transmit and
receive data with an AP. Infrastructure is the mobile computer
default mode when Mobile Companion initially appears.
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-7
Ad Hoc
Select Ad Hoc to enable the mobile computer to form its own local
network where mobile computers communicate peer-to-peer
without APs using a shared ESSID. Select the Long preamble check
box if the mobile computer and its profile are using a long preamble
when transmitting data. A long preamble is approximately 8 bytes
of the packet header attached to the packet prior to transmission.
Devices in Ad Hoc mode are required to use the same preamble
length to interoperate. The mobile computer initiating the Ad Hoc
network sets the channel (using the Channel drop-down list) used by
each peer in the Ad Hoc network.
5. Select the country of operation for the mobile computer from the Country: drop-down list.
This ensures the mobile computer is using country code information compatible with the
country code data used by the associated AP. Select International if using the mobile
computer with a non-Symbol AP or a pre AP-4131 model.
6. Select the Encryption tab to set the mobile computer profile security level.
Figure 5-4. Encryption Tab
The mobile computer supports Open System (no encryption), 40-bit Shared Key, 128-bit
Shared Key, Kerberos and LEAP encryption algorithms. The absence of a physical connection
makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft. Encryption is an efficient method of
preventing data theft and improving data security.
The AP and the mobile computer are required to use the same encryption algorithm to
associate and transmit data. If an AP is set to Open System and an adapter is set to 40-bit
or 128-bit, no association takes place. Similarly, if an adapter is set to Open System and an
AP is set to 40-bit or 128-bit, no association takes place.
®
5-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
If an AP is set to 40-bit and a mobile computer is set to 128-bit the mobile computer can
associate with the AP, but no data transmission and reception can take place.
7. Select one of the following Encryption options from the Algorithm: drop-down list:
Open System
(no encryption)
Use the Open System option as the default setting when no data
packet encryption is needed over the network. Selecting Open
System provides no security for the data being transmitted over the
network.
40-bit Shared Key Select 40-bit encryption and enter a 10-digit hex encryption key. Tap
Reset Keys to set the encryption key to the default values.
128-bit Shared Key Select 128-bit encryption and enter a 26-digit hex encryption key. The
128-bit encryption option provides a higher level of security than 40-
bit encryption while maintaining an 11 Mbps data rate. Tap Reset
Keys to set the encryption key to the default values.
Note: The default hex digit keys are visible any time they are used.
As a security precaution after setting the key values for the network,
the digits are replaced with asterisks * within the encryption key
fields.
If the associated AP is using an optional Passkey, the "active"
mobile computer profile is required to use one as well. The Passkey
is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the
Encryption tab. The Passkey provides an easy way to enter WEP key
data without having to remember the entire 40-bit (10 character) or
128-bit (26 character) hex digit string.
Tap Passkey to display the Passkey window. Enter an easy-to-
remember 4 to 26 character string to be used as the WEP algorithm.
Tap OK. The AP transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP
keys using MD5 algorithms and displays them in the WEP fields.
These are the new WEP keys for the mobile computer profile. Once
displayed in the WEP key fields, the adapter profile behaves as if the
keys were entered manually.
Kerberos
Kerberos is a different form of 128-bit data security whereby a mobile
computer is required to have its request for AP resources
authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the
AP to transmit and receive data with the associated mobile computer.
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-9
Select Kerberos and enter the key distribution center (KDC) and
Realm values. The KDC is located on a server and maintains
information about the APs and users it supports. The KDC also
permits the transmission and receipt of data once the credentials of
the user are verified. Enter the name of the server that hosts the
Kerberos KDC in the Realm field.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an 802.1X
authentication type for wireless LANs that supports strong mutual
authentication between the client and a RADIUS server. It provides
dynamic per-user, per-session Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key
enhancements to mitigate a variety of network attacks.
Select LEAP. When you attempt to connect to the server, the Network
Log On screen appears. Enter your user name, password and domain
name. Consult your system administrator for this information.
8. Select the IP Config tab to configure the following mobile computer profile network address
parameters: IP address, subnet, gateway, DNS and WINS. Changes made within the IP
Config tab only impact the profile selected in the Mode tab and do not impact the network
address parameters configured for other profiles.
Figure 5-5. Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (DHCP)
• Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) from the IP Type drop-down list to
obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server.
DHCP is the default setting for the mobile computer profile. When DHCP is selected, the
IP address fields are read-only.
• Select Static to manually assign the IP, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS and WINS
®
5-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
addresses used by the mobile computer profile.
Figure 5-6. Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (Static)
IP Address
The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate
with each other. Each communication carries the address of the
source and destination networks and the particular machine within
the network associated with the user or host computer at each end.
This address is called the IP address (Internet Protocol address). Each
node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is
made up of a network identifier and a host identifier. Enter the IP
address as a dotted-decimal notation with the decimal value of each
octet separated by a period, for example, 192.168.7.27.
Subnet Mask
Most TCP/IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage
routed IP addresses. Having an organization's network divided into
subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared
network address, for example, 255.255.255.0.
Gateway
DNS
The default gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to
and from a remote destination.
The Domain Name System (DNS) is a distributed Internet directory
service. DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP
addresses. It is also used to control Internet email delivery. Most
Internet service requires DNS to operate properly. If DNS is not
configured, Web sites cannot be located and/or email delivery fails.
WINS
WINS is a Microsoft® Net BIOS name server. WINS eliminates the
broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by
providing a cache or database of translations.
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-11
9. Select the Power tab to set the Radio Transmission Power level and the Power Saving
Modes for the mobile computer profile.
Ad Hoc Mode
Infrastructure Mode
Figure 5-7. Mobile Companion - Power Tab
Adjusting the Radio Transmission Power level enables you to expand or confine the
transmission area with respect to other wireless devices that could be operating nearby.
Reducing a coverage area in high traffic areas improves transmission quality by reducing the
number of noises in that coverage area.
• In Infrastructure mode there are two transmission power options:
•
•
Select Automatic to use the AP power level. Automatic is the default mode for mobile
computers operating in Infrastructure mode.
Select Power Plus to set the mobile computer transmission power one level higher than the
level set for the AP.
• In Ad Hoc mode there are five transmission power options:
•
Select Maximum power to set the mobile computer to the highest transmission power level.
Select Maximum power when operating in highly reflective environments and areas where
other devices could be operating nearby. Additionally, use the maximum power level when
attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area.
•
•
Select 50%, 25% or 10% to set the transmit power level to that percentage of the maximum
power level.
Select Minimum power to set the mobile computer to the lowest transmission power level.
Use the minimum power level when communicating with other devices in very close
proximity. Additionally, select minimum power in instances where little or no radio
interference from other devices is anticipated.
®
5-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
The Automatic Power Saving Mode switches to Best Network Performance when an AC
power supply is detected. If a battery is used, an appropriate setting between Best Network
Performance and Acceptable Network Performance is automatically chosen based on a real-
time analysis of network usage. The Automatic Power Saving Mode is the default setting
and extends the operating time before the battery is recharged.
The Manual Power Saving Mode allows you to select a performance level suited to intended
operation. There are six settings ranging from the Best Network Performance (using the
most battery power) to Acceptable Network Performance (using the least battery power). A
network performance description is displayed for each power range.
10. Tap OK to implement power consumption changes for the mobile computer profile.
Status
To view the status of the wireless network connection, select Status from the Mobile Companion
menu.
1. Select the Signal tab to display a real-time graph of the signal quality of the mobile
computer to the associated AP (Infrastructure Mode only). The number of times the mobile
computer has roamed to and from APs, the current data rate, and the network status are
displayed. Signal quality is an indicator of how clearly the adapter can hear the associated
AP.
Figure 5-8. Mobile Companion - Signal Tab
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-13
The Signal tab is view only and is not available if the current operating mode
is Ad Hoc.
Note
Missed Beacons
Displays the amount of beacons (uniform system packets broadcast
by the AP to keep the network synchronized) missed by the mobile
computer. The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal. As
long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association
is not jeopardized by an excess of missed AP beacons. If the LED is
Red, an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce
the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal.
Txmit Retries
Displays the number of data packets retransmitted by the mobile
(Transmit Retries) computer. The fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal. As long
as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not
jeopardized. If the LED is red, an association with a different AP could
be warranted to reduce the amount of transmit retries and improve
the signal.
Signal
Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) of the signal
transmitted between the AP and mobile computer. As long as the LED
to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not
jeopardized. If the LED is red, an association with a different AP could
be warranted to improve the signal.
2. Select the Info tab to view the mobile computer’s current software and driver revision data
as well as the operating parameters of the current profile.
Figure 5-9. Mobile Companion - Info Tab
®
5-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Version
Information
Displays the mobile computer's software, driver, firmware and
hardware versions as well as country information. This data is
consistent for the mobile computer regardless of which mobile
computer profile is the current profile.
Current Status
Displays the mobile computer’s current Profile Name, ESSID, and
Encryption mode. mobile computer performance is displayed using a
verbal indicator of signal strength. mobile computer operating
information differs depending on which profile is enabled as the
current profile.
3. Select the IP Status tab to view the mobile computer’s network address information. Unlike
the IP Config tab in Finding WLANs, the IP Status tab is view only with no user-configurable
data fields.
Figure 5-10. Mobile Companion - IP Status Tab
IP Type
If DHCP was selected from the IP Config tab, leased IP address and
network address data displays for the mobile computer. If Static was
selected, the values displayed were input manually in the IP Config
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-15
IP Address
The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate
with each other. Each communication carries the address of the
source and destination networks and the particular machine within
the network associated with the user or host computer at each end.
This address is called the IP address. Each node on the IP network
must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network
identifier and a host identifier. Enter the IP address as a dotted-
decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a
period, for example, 192.168.7.27.
Subnet Mask
Most TCP/IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage
routed IP addresses. Having an organization's network divided into
subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared
network address, for example, 255.255.255.0.
Gateway
DNS
The gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from
a remote destination.
The Domain Name System (DNS) is a distributed Internet directory
service. DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP
addresses. It is also used to control Internet e-mail delivery. Most
Internet service requires DNS to operate properly. If DNS is not
configured, Web sites cannot be located or e-mail delivery fails.
WINS
WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server. WINS eliminates the
broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by
providing a cache or database of translations.
MAC Address
Host Name
An IEEE 48-bit address the mobile computer is assigned at the factory
that uniquely identifies the adapter at the physical layer.
Displays the name of the mobile computer.
4. Tap Renew to refresh the information displayed on the IP Status tab.
®
5-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
5. Select the Ping tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets across the network to the
specified IP address.
Figure 5-11. Mobile Companion - Ping Tab
6. Select a target device IP address from the IP drop-down list.
7. Select the size of the packet transmission from the Size drop-down list.
8. Tap Start Test to begin the ping test.
9. Tap Stop Test to terminate the ping test.
The average mega-bits per second, signal strength, data rate currently in use, test statistics
and round trip (RT) times are displayed for each test. The associated AP MAC address is also
displayed. The signal strength level and the data transmission rate are displayed in real-time
bar graphs.
10. Select the APs tab to view APs with the same ESSID as the mobile computer’s profile.
Figure 5-12. Mobile Companion - APs Tab
The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from its antenna to indicate its
associated status. Tapping on the icon displays a menu with Set Mandatory and Set
Roaming options.
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-17
Selecting the Set Mandatory item prohibits the mobile computer from associating with a
different AP. The letter M displays on top of the icon when the Set Mandatory option is
selected.
Selecting Set Roaming allows the mobile computer to roam to any AP with a better signal.
These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry.
Tap Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID. A signal strength value of
32 is the highest possible. The APs tab only displays when Infrastructure is selected as the
mobile computer operating mode from the Mode tab.
11. If the mobile computer is in Ad Hoc mode, select the Peers tab to display the BSSID or MAC
addresses of the other mobile computers in the network, their operating mode (PSP or CAM),
their transmit rate, their supported data rate and the length of time an adapter is out of the
Ad Hoc network. Tap Refresh to update the Peers tab to the latest Ad Hoc network
performance and mobile computer membership data.
Figure 5-13. Mobile Companion - Peers Tab
®
5-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Setting Options
Select Options from the Mobile Companion menu to enable or disable international roaming,
configure consumption avoidance capabilities, enable system sounds, and set temporary settings.
Figure 5-14. Mobile Companion - Option Settings
1. Select the Access AP networks check box to display available AP networks and their signal
strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab. These are the APs available to the
mobile computer profile for association. If this option was previously disabled, refresh the
Available WLAN Networks tab to display the AP networks available to the mobile computer.
2. Select the Access Ad-Hoc networks check box to display available peer (adapter) networks
and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab. These are peers
available to the mobile computer profile for association. If this option was previously
disabled, refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the Ad Hoc networks
available to the mobile computer.
3. Select the Disable Profile Roaming check box to disable the mobile computer from roaming
and associating to APs with country codes other than the United States.
4. Select the Enable Sounds check box to initiate an audible signal when performing a ping test
and associating with an AP. The tones are important to notify users if the pinging is received
or if the mobile computer has roamed to another AP.
Mobile Companion has a password protection feature. When Mobile
Companion initially appears, the password is off by default.
Note
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-19
1. To create a password, tap Change Password.
Figure 5-15. Mobile Companion - Change Password
2. Enter a case sensitive password (10 characters maximum) in the Current Password field and
tap OK. To change the current password, enter the current password in the Current
Password field and enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password
fields and tap OK.
Changing Profiles
Select WLAN Profiles from the Mobile Companion menu to view, connect to, create and edit a profile.
A completed profile is a set of adapter configuration settings that can be used in different locations
to connect to a wireless network. Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre-defined
operating parameters available for use in various network environments. When the WLAN Profiles
window initially appears, existing profiles appear in the WLAN Profiles list box.
Figure 5-16. Mobile Companion - WLAN Profiles
Select a profile from the list box and tap Connect to set that profile as the active profile. The active
profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left. Once selected, the mobile computer is using
the ESSID, encryption and power consumption settings initially configured for that profile.
®
5-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Editing a Profile
Select a profile from the list box and tap Edit to display the Mode tab where the ESSID and operating
mode can be changed for the profile. Use the Encryption, IP Config, and Power tabs as necessary to
edit the profile power consumption and security parameters.
Creating a New Profile
Tap New to display the Mode tab wherein the profile name and ESSID can be set. Use the Encryption,
IP Config and Power tabs as required to set security, network address information and power
consumption level for the new profile.
Deleting a Profile
Select a profile to delete from the list box and tap Delete to remove the selected profile.
Ordering Profiles
Select a profile from the list box and tap Move Up or Move Down to order the profile. If the current
profile association is lost, Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list
and then the next until a new association is achieved.
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-21
Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File
Default settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the mobile computer using a registration
(.reg) file. A sample .reg file is provided as part of the DCP for MC9000w. Edit the file using a text
editor. See notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified.
Save this text file as SPECTRUM24DS.REG. Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on
the mobile computer. Once this file is loaded onto the mobile computer, these settings are restored
after a cold boot.
Refer to the DCP for MC9000w for the latest SPECTRUM24DS.REG sample
file.
Note
Sample Spectrum24DS .Reg File
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN]
"Group"="NDIS"
"ImagePath"="NETWLAN.dll"
"DisplayName"="802.11b Wireless LAN"
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN\Linkage]
"Route"=multi_sz:"NETWLAN1"
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1]
"Group"="NDIS"
"ImagePath"="NETWLAN.dll"
"DisplayName"="802.11b Wireless LAN"
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\BuiltIn\EAPWLAN]
"Prefix"="LEP"
"Dll"="EAPWLAN.dll"
"Index"=dword:00000001
"Order"=dword:00000004
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\BuiltIn\TRANS]
"Prefix"="PRT"
"Dll"="TRANS.dll"
"Index"=dword:00000001
"Order"=dword:00000004
®
5-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
; TYPE 2 TRILOGY
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\PCMCIA\Symbol_Technologies-LA4111_Spectrum24_Wireless_LAN_PC_Card-077d]
"Dll"="NDIS.dll"
"Prefix"="NDS"
"Miniport"="NETWLAN"
"Index"=dword:00000001
; TYPE 3 TRILOGY
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\PCMCIA\Symbol-Spectrum24_LA4100_Series_WLAN_PC_Card-e063]
"Dll"="NDIS.dll"
"Prefix"="NDS"
"Miniport"="NETWLAN"
"Index"=dword:00000001
; TYPE 3 Socketcom
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\PCMCIA\Socket-CF+_LP_WLAN_Card_Rev_A-09DF]
"Dll"="NDIS.dll"
"Prefix"="NDS"
"Miniport"="NETWLAN"
"Index"=dword:00000001
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\Parms]
"AdapterModel"="802.11b Wireless LAN"; must match DisplayName value
"Version"="3.7.11.4"
"CardType"=dword:00000000
"IoBaseAddress"=dword:00000300
"IoLength"=dword:00000046
"Password"="3745A4CA1FD2D1CFC10041C7576C0E6423A815E6D4D094C8D87441C26A6C0211153DDE9C851085"
"RogueAPDetection"=dword:00000001
"ProtocolsToBindTo"=multi_sz:"NOT","NDISUIO","EAPWLAN"
"Profile"="Default"
"Index"=dword:00000000
"ESS_ID"="101"
"Ess_TxPower"=dword:00000000
"AdHoc_TxPower"=dword:00000000
"Channel"=dword:00000011
"PortType"=dword:00000001
"LongPreamble"=dword:00000000
"ChannelMask"="000007FF"
"IntlRoaming"=dword:00000000
"MUEncryptionAlgorithm"=dword:00000001
"EncryptionKey4"="292E6BE5D61CEB092CEEA957038A21B5BBEAEF8C5F8D5FC24CDCFC0CCB"
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-23
"EncryptionKey3"="295EEC95BE6CD479ED9E512706FA45C54D9A99FC25FD8EB251AC650C8B"
"EncryptionKey2"="060105285C8933EEECCA3F7154FB1636A719221BCDDBCCF98FE9600C4A"
"EncryptionKey1"="1AA4F34F4E884A1960A63DD9CBB0EEBA2FFA689D16C7751D933D6D0C80"
"EncryptionKeyId"=dword:00000001
"PowerIndex"=dword:00000001
"BT_TIME"=dword:00000030
"Diversity"=dword:00000000
"LCachePwd"=dword:1; 0 = Save always in plain text
; 1 = Save until a Warm Boot (not in registry, not in plain text)
; 2 = Do not save password at all
"LTimeoutMinutes"=dword:00000000; In Hexidecimal, only used for LCachePwd = 1
; Typical Examples:
; dword:00000000 = Do not use timeout
; dword:0000000F = 15 = 15 minutes
; dword:0000001E = 30 = 30 minutes
; dword:0000003C = 60 = 1 hour
; dword:00000078 = 120 = 2 hours
; dword:000000F0 = 240 = 4 hours
; dword:000001E0 = 480 = 8 hours
; dword:000002D0 = 720 = 12 hours
; dword:000005A0 = 1440 = 1 Day
; "UNAME"="myLEAPUserName"; Only uncomment when LCachePwd = 0
; "UPwd"="myLEAPPassword"; Only uncomment when LCachePwd = 0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\Parms\TcpIp]
"DhcpMaxRetry"=dword:00000001
"DhcpRetryDialogue"=dword:ffffffff
"DhcpInitDelayInterval"=dword:00002710
"UseZeroBroadcast"=dword:00000000
"AutoCfg"=dword:00000001
"EnableDHCP"=dword:00000001; 0 = Use static IP
; 1 = Use DHCP
;**************************************************
; Uncomment the next keys if Static IPs are used
;**************************************************
; "IpAddress"="192.168.1.1"; Replace these IP address with the required static values
; "Subnetmask"="192.168.1.2"
; "DefaultGateway"="192.168.1.3"
; "DNS"="192.168.1.4"
; "WINS"="192.168.1.5"
®
5-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
;**************************************************
; End of static IP keys
;**************************************************
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Symbol Technologies, Inc.\NICTT]
"EncryptionMask"=dword:00000007
"APNetworks"=dword:00000001
"AdHocNetworks"=dword:00000001
"ManualConfig"=dword:00000000
"Sounds"=dword:00000000
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Symbol Technologies, Inc.\Profiles]
"ProfileVersion"="3.7.0.0"
"Password"="295E6B91D66EEB7B2C9DA95403F521B7BBE3EF875FF55FBF4CD3FC71104DECCFBED6D4C9ED1181
"
"CurrentProfileName"="Default"
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Symbol Technologies, Inc.\Profiles\Default]
"Index"=dword:00000000
"ESS_ID"="101"
"Channel"=dword:00000011
"PortType"=dword:00000001
"LongPreamble"=dword:00000000
"TxPower"=dword:00000000
"CountryCode"="US"
"IntlRoaming"=dword:00000000
"MUEncryptionAlgorithm"=dword:00000001
"EncryptionKey4"="132733C8F4D20D704C31E667052839F3211610D3734011F98B80D00B97"
"EncryptionKey3"="36035A4450CD63D191CA3202D8B7F662A819E9D0F99E80D972C2400BFB"
"EncryptionKey2"="04A06E757903EC2AA18F2BE872C8367392F56738B61B761935DD2A0C05"
"EncryptionKey1"="11C2DDD4F375059A31844E260963F035CF760BAD3544C981B016B90BF2"
"EncryptionKeyId"=dword:00000001
"EnableDHCP"=dword:00000001
"Aps"=dword:00000001
"PowerIndex"=dword:00000001
"Enabled"=dword:00000001
"MaybeVLan"=dword:00000000
"EnableDHCP"=dword:00000001; 0 = Use static IP
; 1 = Use DHCP
;**************************************************
Spectrum24 Configuration
5-25
; Uncomment the next keys if Static IPs are used
;**************************************************
; "IpAddress"="192.168.1.1"; Replace these IP addresses with the required static values
; "Subnetmask"="192.168.1.2"
; "DefaultGateway"="192.168.1.3"
; "DNS"="192.168.1.4"
; "WINS"="192.168.1.5"
;**************************************************
; End of static IP keys
;**************************************************
®
5-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
AirBEAM Smart
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3
AirBEAM Package Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
AirBEAM License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Packages(1) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Packages(2) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Misc(1) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Misc(2) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Misc(3) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Synchronizing with the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Manual Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
AirBEAM Staging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
®
6-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
AirBEAM Smart
6-3
The AirBEAM Smart product allows specially designed software packages to be transferred between
a host server and Symbol wireless handheld devices. Before transfer, AirBEAM Smart checks and
compares package version, so that only updated packages are loaded.
AirBEAM Smart resides on radio-equipped client devices, and allows them to request, download, and
install software, as well as to upload files and status data. Both download and upload of files can be
accomplished in a single communications session. The ability to transfer software over a radio
network can greatly reduce the logistical efforts of client software management.
In an AirBEAM Smart system, a network-accessible host server acts as the storage point for the
software transfer. The AirBEAM Smart Client uses the industry standard FTP or TFTP file transfer
protocols to check the host system for updates, and if necessary, to transfer updated software.
For more detailed information about AirBEAM Smart, refer to the AirBEAM®
Smart Windows® CE Client Product Reference Guide (p/n 72-63060-xx).
Note
AirBEAM Package Builder
In a typical distributed AirBEAM system, software to be transferred is organized into packages. In
general, an AirBEAM package is simply a set of files that are assigned attributes both as an entire
package and as individual component files. The package is assigned a version number, and the
transfer occurs when an updated version is available.
An AirBEAM package can optionally contain developer-specified logic to be used to install the
package. Installation logic is typically used to update client device flash images or radio firmware.
Examples of common AirBEAM packages would include packages for custom client application
software, radio firmware and AirBEAM Smart Client software.
Once these packages are built, they are installed on the host server for retrieval by the handheld
device. The AirBEAM Package Builder is a utility used to define, generate and install AirBEAM
packages to a server. The packages are then loaded from the server onto a client device equipped
with an AirBEAM Smart Client executable.
For detailed instructions on how to define, generate and install AirBEAM packages to the server, refer
to the AirBEAM Package Builder Product Reference Guide, p/n 72-55769-xx.
®
6-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
AirBEAM Smart Client
The AirBEAM Smart Client is installed on the handheld mobile computer. It is configured with the
server access information, the names of the packages to be downloaded and other controlling
parameters. When the AirBEAM Smart Client is launched, the device connects to the specified FTP
server and checks the packages it is configured to look for. If the package version was updated, the
client requests the transfer.
AirBEAM License
The AirBEAM Smart Client is a licensed software product. The AirBEAM Smart Client's version
synchronization functionality is enabled through a license key file that is stored on the client device.
The license key file can be built into AirBEAM Smart Client's image, or downloaded in a special
AirBEAM package.
The AirBEAM license key file contains a unique key and a customer specific banner that is displayed
when the AirBEAM Smart Client version synchronization logic is invoked.
Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client
1. Tap Start - Programs - AirBEAM Smart Client. The AirBEAM Smart CE window appears.
2. Tap File - Configure. The AirBEAM configuration window appears.
Figure 6-1. AirBEAM Configuration Window
The configuration window is used to view and edit AirBEAM Smart Client configurations. This dialog
box has six tabs that you can modify - Packages(1), Packages(2), Server, Misc(1), Misc(2) and Misc(3).
AirBEAM Smart
6-5
Packages(1) Tab
This tab is used to specify the package name of the first four of eight packages
that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process. The
specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the
specified package server.
Field
Package 1
Package 2
Package 3
Package 4
Description
Package name of the first of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of the second of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of the third of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of the fourth of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Packages(2) Tab
This tab is used to specify the package name of the last four of eight packages
that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process. The
specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the
specified package server.
Field
Package 5
Package 6
Package 7
Package 8
Upload Pkg
Description
Package name of the fifth of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of the sixth of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of the seventh of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of the eighth of eight packages. This is an optional field.
Package name of a package that is to be processed for “upload files” during the AirBEAM
synchronization process. The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available
on the specified package server. This is an optional field.
Server Tab
This tab is used to specify the configurations of the server to which the client
connects during the package synchronization process.
®
6-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Field
IP Address
Directory
Description
The IP Address of the server. It may be a host name or a dot notation format.
The directory on the server that contains the AirBEAM package definition files. All AirBEAM package
definition files are retrieved from this directory during the package synchronization process.
User
The FTP user name that is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process.
Password
The FTP password that corresponds to the FTP user specified in the User field. The specified password
is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process.
Misc(1) Tab
This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features.
Field
Auto-load
Description
This drop-down list is used to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client is to be invoked automatically
when the client device is rebooted. The selections are:
Disable: the AirBEAM Smart Client is not invoked automatically during the
boot sequence.
Interactive: the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the
boot sequence. The package synchronization process is started automatically.
The Synchronization Dialog box appears, and the user is required to press the
OK button when the process is complete.
Non-interactive: the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during
the boot sequence. The package synchronization process is started
automatically. The Synchronization Dialog box is displayed, but the user is not
required to tap OK when the process is complete. The Synchronization Dialog
box terminates automatically.
Background: the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the
boot sequence. The package synchronization process is started automatically.
Nothing is displayed while the synchronization process is occurring.
AirBEAM Smart
6-7
Field
Description
RAM
Management
This check box specifies whether the automatic RAM management is enabled during the package
synchronization process.
If enabled, RAM management logic is invoked when there is not enough free disk space to download
a package. The RAM management logic attempts to remove any discardable AirBEAM packages
resident on the client.
Suppress
Separator
This check box specifies whether the automatic insertion of a file path separator character should be
suppressed when the client generated server package definition file names.
When enabled, the parameter also disables the appending of .apd to the package. This feature is useful
for AS/400 systems, in which the file path separator character is a period. When this feature is
enabled, the server directory (Directory) and package name (Package 1, Package 2, Package 3, and
Package 4) are appended "as is” when building the name for the server package definition file.
When this feature is disabled, a standard file path separator is used to separate the server directory
(Directory) and package name (Package 1, Package 2, Package 3, and Package 4) when building the
name for the server package definition file. In addition, an .apd extension is appended automatically.
TFTP
This check box specifies whether the TFTP protocol is to be used to download files. By default, the
AirBEAM Smart Client uses the FTP protocol.
WNMS
This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uploads a WNMS information file at the
end of each version synchronization.
Misc(2) Tab
This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features.
®
6-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Field
Auto-retry
Description
This field is used to specify whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries if there is a
failure during the synchronization process.
If this feature is enabled, the AirBEAM Smart Client displays a popup dialog indicating the attempt
of a retry. The popup dialog is displayed for the number of seconds specified in the Retry Delay field.
The valid values for this field are:
-1: the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries indefinitely.
0: the AirBEAM Smart Client does not automatically retry.
-0: the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries up to the number of times
specified.
Retry Delay
In-use Test
This field specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the AirBEAM Smart Client delays before
automatically retrying after a synchronization failure.
This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client tests to determine if a file is in-use
before downloading. If the In-use Test feature is enabled, the AirBEAM Smart Client downloads a
temporary copy of any files that are in-use. If any temporary in-use files are downloaded the
AirBEAM Smart Client automatically resets the client to complete the copy of the in-use files. If the
In-use Test feature is disabled, the synchronization process fails (-813) if any download files are in-
use.
Wait Welcome
Close Apps
This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client waits for the WELCOME windows to
be completed before automatically launching the synchronization process after a reset.
This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically attempts to close non-
system applications prior to resetting the mobile unit. If enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client sends
a WM_CLOSE message to all non-system applications before resetting the mobile unit. This feature
offers applications the opportunity to prepare (i.e. close open files) for the pending reset.
Misc(3) Tab
This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features.
AirBEAM Smart
6-9
Field
Description
Use DHCP server
This check box control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option
66 to specify the IP address of the FTP/TFTP server.
If enabled, special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the
"TFTP server name" field (option 66). The special RF network registry settings are included, but
commented out, in the radio network registry initialization files (essid_xxxx_yy.reg).
Use DHCP bootfile This check box control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option
67 to specify the Package and Package 1 parameters.
If enabled, special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the
"Bootfile name" field (option 67). The special RF network registry settings are included, but
commented out, in the radio network registry initialization files (essid_xxxx_yy.reg).
Synchronizing with the Server
When the synchronization process is initiated, the AirBEAM Smart Client attempts to open an FTP
session using the AirBEAM Smart Client configuration. Once connected, the client processes the
specified packages. Packages are loaded only if the server version of a given package is different from
the version loaded on the client. Once the upload process is complete, the AirBEAM Smart Client
closes the FTP session with the server.
The AirBEAM Smart Client can launch an FTP session with the server either manually, when initiated
by the user, or automatically.
Manual Synchronization
4.
2. From the main AirBEAM CE window, tap File - Synchronize.
3. Once connected, the AirBEAM Synchronize window appears.
• The Status List displays status messages that indicate the
progress of the synchronization process.
• Tap OK to return to the Main Menu. This button remains inactive
until the synchronization process is complete.
• Tap Retry to restart the synchronization process. This button is
activated only if there is an error during the synchronization
process.
AirBEAM Smart
6-11
AirBEAM Staging
The AirBEAM Smart staging support is intended to speed up and simplify the process of staging
custom or updated operating software onto mobile devices directly from manufacturing. The staging
support is part of the AirBEAM Smart CE Client that is integrated into the mobile computer.
The AirBEAM Smart support works by defaulting the AirBEAM Client configuration to a known set of
values and launching the AirBEAM Smart package download logic. A staging environment, including
an RF network, FTP server and AirBEAM packages must be setup. Ideally a staging network and server
should be setup to match the default AirBEAM Staging client configuration.
The AirBEAM Smart staging utility is invoked from the Applications directory (tap Start - Programs -
File Explorer - Application).
The AirBEAM Staging support provides several benefits:
•
•
Many devices can be simultaneously loaded over the RF network.
The AirBEAM staging utility provides a simple single dialog user interface that is used to
quickly start the software installation process.
®
6-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Applications
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Creating Appointments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Using the Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Creating Meeting Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Using the Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Using the Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Synchronizing E-mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Using the Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
®
7-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Creating E-mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Typing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Writing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Tips for Working in Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
MSN® Messenger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Setting Up An Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Working with Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Chatting with Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Microsoft Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Getting Books on the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Using the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Reading a Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Using Reader Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Removing a Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Mobile Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Favorite Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Creating Mobile Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Using AvantGo Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Using Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Browsing the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Copy Pictures to the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Edit Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Send Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Set Picture as Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Applications
7-3
The mobile computer includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, and Notes applications. You can use
these programs individually or together. For example, e-mail addresses stored in Contacts can be
used to address e-mail messages in Inbox.
Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in these applications between the host computer
and the mobile computer. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync compares the changes you made on
the mobile computer and host computer and updates both with the latest information. For information
You can switch to any of these programs by tapping them on the Start menu.
®
7-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Calendar
Use Calendar to schedule appointments such as meetings. You can view appointments in different
ways (Agenda, Day, Week, Month, and Year) and easily change views using the View menu.
Tap to go to today.
Tap to display or edit the
appointment details.
Tap to create a new appointment.
Figure 7-1. Calendar Application
You can customize the Calendar display, such as changing the first day of the
week, by tapping Tools - Options.
Note
Creating Appointments
To create an appointment:
1. Tap Start - Calendar to open the application.
2. If you are in Day or Week view, tap the desired date and time for the appointment.
Applications
7-5
3. Tap New.
Tap to return to the calendar (the
appointment is saved automatically).
Tap to choose from
predefined text.
Tap to choose from previously
entered locations.
Tap to select a time.
Tap to select a date.
Notes is a good place for
maps and directions.
Figure 7-2. Entering an Appointment
4. Using the input panel, enter the subject and a location. Tap first to select the field.
5. If needed, tap the date and time to change them.
6. Enter other desired information. Hide the input panel to see all available fields.
7. To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more
8. When finished, tap OK to return to the Calendar.
If you select Remind me in an appointment, the mobile computer notifies you
according to the options set in Start - Settings - Personal tab -Sounds &
Notifications.
Note
®
7-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Using the Summary Screen
When you tap an appointment in Calendar, a summary screen appears. Tap Edit to change the
appointment.
View appointment details.
View notes.
Tap to change
appointment.
Figure 7-3. Appointment Summary Screen
Creating Meeting Requests
You can use Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or Pocket Outlook. The meeting notice
is created automatically and sent either when you synchronize Inbox or when you connect to the e-
mail server. Indicate how you want meeting requests sent by tapping Tools - Options. If you send and
receive e-mail messages through ActiveSync, select ActiveSync.
To schedule a meeting:
1. Create an appointment.
2. In the appointment details, hide the input panel, then tap Attendees.
3. From the list of e-mail addresses you've entered in Contacts, select the meeting attendees.
The meeting notice is created and placed in the Outbox folder. For more information on sending and
receiving meeting requests, see Calendar Help and Inbox Help on the mobile computer.
Applications
7-7
Contacts
Contacts maintains a list of associates and friends so you can easily locate information at home or
on the road. Using the infrared (IR) port, you can share Contacts information with other users.
Select the category of contacts
you want displayed in the list
Tap and enter part of a name to
quickly find it in the list
Tap to see additional phone numbers
and e-mail addresses
Tap to display or edit the
contact details
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions
Tap to create a new contact.
Figure 7-4. Contact Application
To change the way information is listed, tap Tools - Options.
Note
To create a contact:
1. Tap Start - Contacts to open the application.
®
7-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
2. Tap New.
Tap to return to the contact list (the
contact is saved automatically).
Scroll to see more fields.
Notes is a good place for
maps and directions.
Figure 7-5. Creating a Contact
3. Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information. Scroll down to see all
fields.
4. To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories. Select a category from the
drop-down list. In the contact list, you can display contacts by category.
5. To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more
6. When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list.
You may find a contact in one of four ways:
•
In the contact list, enter a contact name in the box under the navigation bar. To show all
contacts again, clear text from the box or tap the button to the right of the box.
•
In the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default) and select the type
of contact to display. To show all contacts again, select All Contacts. To view a contact not
assigned to a category, select None.
•
To view the names of companies contacts work for, in the contact list, tap View - By
Company. The number of contacts that work for that company appears to the right of the
company name.
Applications
7-9
•
Tap Start - Find, enter the contact name, select Contacts for the type, then tap Go.
Using the Summary Screen
When you tap a contact in the contact list, a summary screen appears. Tap Edit to change the
information.
View contact details.
Tap to view notes.
Tap to change contact information.
Figure 7-6. Contacts Summary Screen
®
7-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Tasks
Use Tasks to keep a “to do” list.
Select the category of tasks you
want displayed in the list.
Select the sort
order of the list.
Indicates high priority.
Tap to display or edit the
task details.
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to create a new contact.
Figure 7-7. Task Application
To change the way information displays in the list, tap Tools - Options.
Note
To create a task:
1. Tap Start - Tasks to open the application.
Applications
7-11
2. Tap New.
Tap to return to the task list (the task
is saved automatically).
Tap to choose from
predefined subjects.
Notes is a good place for
maps and directions.
Figure 7-8. Creating a Task
3. Using the input panel, enter a description in the Subject field.
4. You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field.
If the input panel is open, hide it to see all available fields.
5. To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a category from the list. In the
task list, you can display tasks by category.
6. To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more
7. Tap OK to return to the task list.
To create a task with only a subject, tap Tools - Entry Bar. Then tap in the Tap
here to add a new task field and enter task information.
Note
®
7-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Using the Summary Screen
When you tap a task in the task list, a summary screen appears. To change the task, tap Edit.
View task details.
Tap to show and hide additional
summary information.
View notes.
Tap to change task.
Figure 7-9. Task Summary Screen
Applications
7-13
Notes
Capture thoughts, reminders, ideas, drawings, and phone numbers with Notes. You can create a
written note or a recording. You can also include a recording in a note. If a note is open when you
create the recording, it is included in the note as an icon. If the note list is displayed, it is created as
a stand-alone recording.
Tap to change the
sort order of the list.
Tap to open a note or play
a recording.
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to record.
Tap to show or hide the
Recording toolbar.
Tap to create a new contact.
Figure 7-10. Notes Application
To create a note:
1. Tap Start - Notes to open the application.
2. Tap New.
®
7-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
3. Create a note by writing, drawing, typing, and recording. For more information about using
the input panel, writing and drawing on the screen, and creating recordings, see Chapter 2,
Tap to return to the task list (the task
is saved automatically).
Tap to show or hide
the input panel.
Tap to write on the screen.
Tap to add a recording to
the note.
Figure 7-11. Creating a Note
Applications
7-15
Inbox
Use Inbox to send and receive e-mail messages in the following ways:
•
•
Synchronize e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Outlook on the host computer.
Send and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mail server through an
Internet service provider (ISP) or a network.
Synchronizing E-mail Messages
To synchronize e-mail messages, first enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync options. For
information on enabling Inbox synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the host computer.
During synchronization:
•
E-mail messages are copied from the Inbox folder of Exchange or Outlook on the host
computer to the ActiveSync folder on the mobile computer. By default, you receive messages
from the last three days only, the first 100 lines of each message, and file attachments of
less than 100 Kb in size.
•
•
E-mail messages in the Outbox folder on the mobile computer are transferred to Exchange
or Outlook, then sent from those programs.
E-mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on the host computer to be
transferred.
Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server
You can set up a connection to an e-mail server to send and receive e-mail messages using a network
connection and Inbox on the mobile computer.
The ISP or network must use a POP3 e-mail server and an SMTP gateway.
Note
When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the mobile computer Inbox
folder, messages in the mobile computer Outbox folder are sent, and messages that were deleted on
the e-mail server are removed from the mobile computer Inbox.
Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to the e-mail server rather than
the host computer. When you delete a message on the mobile computer, it's also deleted from the e-
mail server the next time you connect.
®
7-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and respond to messages while
connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on
the mobile computer.
When working offline, once you've downloaded new message headers or partial messages, you can
disconnect from the e-mail server, then decide which messages to download completely. The next
time you connect, Inbox downloads the complete messages you've marked for retrieval and sends the
messages you've created.
You can use multiple e-mail services to receive messages. For each e-mail service you intend to use,
first set up and name the e-mail service. If you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes,
set up and name each mailbox connection.
Setting Up an E-mail Service
In Inbox on the mobile computer, tap Accounts, then New Account. Follow the instructions in the
wizard on the screen. For an explanation of a screen, tap Start, then Help.
When finished, tap Accounts, then Connect to connect to the e-mail server. For more information on
Applications
7-17
Using the Message List
Messages you receive display in the message list box. By default, the most recently received
messages are listed first.
Select the service and folder you
want to display
Select the sort order for
messages
Tap to open a message
Tap and hold to display a
pop-up menu of actions
Tap to connect and to send
and receive e-mail
Tap to connect to the
selected service
Figure 7-12. Inbox Application
®
7-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
When you receive a message, tap it in the list box to open it. Unread messages display in bold.
Tap to return to the
message list.
Tap to delete
this message.
Tap to view the previous or
next message.
Tap to reply to or
forward this message.
Figure 7-13. Viewing a Message
When you connect to the e-mail server or synchronize with the host computer, Inbox downloads by
default only messages from the last three days, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file
attachments of less than 100 KB in size. The original messages remain on the e-mail server or the
host computer.
You can mark the messages that you want to retrieve completely the next time you synchronize or
connect to the e-mail server. In the message list, tap and hold the message you want to retrieve. On
the pop-up menu, tap Mark for Download. The icons in the Inbox message list indicates message
status.
You specify downloading preferences when you set up the service or select synchronization options.
You can change them at any time:
•
Change options for Inbox synchronization using ActiveSync options. For more information,
see ActiveSync Help.
Applications
7-19
•
Change options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on the mobile computer. Tap
Tools - Options. On the Accounts tab, tap the account you want to change. Tap and hold the
account and select Delete to remove it.
Creating E-mail Messages
To create an e-mail message:
1. Tap New.
2. In the To field, enter an e-mail or SMS address of one or more recipients, separating each
with a semicolon, or select a name from the contact list by tapping the Address Book icon.
All e-mail addresses entered in the e-mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book.
Tap to send the message.
Tap to show or hide the
complete header
Tap to show/hide the
recording tool
Tap to display the Address Book
Tap to insert common messages
Figure 7-14. Creating a Message
3. Enter the message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, tap My Text and select a
message.
4. Tap Send when you're finished. If you’re working offline, the message is transferred to the
Outbox folder and sent the next time you synchronize.
®
7-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received, tap Edit - Options, and select
the Request SMS text message delivery notification check box before sending the message.
Managing E-mail Messages and Folders
By default, messages are displayed in one of five folders for each account you've created: Inbox,
Deleted Items, Drafts, Outbox, and Sent Items. The Deleted Items folder contains messages that have
been deleted on the mobile computer. The behavior of the Deleted and Sent Items folders depends
on the options you selected. In the message list, tap Tools - Options. On the Message tab, select the
options.
To organize messages into additional folders, tap Tools - Manage Folders to create new folders. To
move a message to another folder, in the message list, tap and hold the message, then tap Move to
on the pop-up menu.
Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server
The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or
IMAP4.
•
If you use ActiveSync, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically
synchronized with the mobile computer. You can select to synchronize additional folders by
designating them for ActiveSync. The folders you create and the messages you move are
mirrored on the server. For example, if you move two messages from the Inbox folder to a
folder named Family, and you have designated Family for synchronization, the server creates
a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. You can then read the
messages while away from the host computer.
•
•
If you use SMS, messages are stored in the Inbox folder.
If you use POP3 and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken
between the messages on the mobile computer and their copies on the mail server. The next
time you connect, the mail server notes the messages missing from the mobile computer
Inbox and deletes them from the server. This prevents you from having duplicate copies of a
message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages moved to folders
created from anywhere except the mobile computer.
•
If you use IMAP4, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on
the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you connect to the mail server,
whether it is from the mobile computer or host computer. This synchronization of folders
occurs whenever you connect to the mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete
folders when connected.
Applications
7-21
Pocket Word
Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on the host computer to give you access to copies of
documents. You can create new documents on the mobile computer, or copy documents from the host
computer to the mobile computer. Synchronize documents between the host computer and the mobile
computer so that you have the most up-to-date information in both locations.
To create a new document in Pocket Word, such as a letter, meeting minutes, or a trip report, tap Start
- Programs - Pocket Word - New icon. A blank document appears. Or, if you've selected a template
for new documents in the Options dialog box, that template appears with appropriate formatting
applied. You can open only one document at a time; when you open a second document, you'll be
asked to save the first. You can save a document in a variety of formats, including Word (.doc), Pocket
Word (.psw), Rich Text Format (.rtf), and Plain Text (.txt).
Pocket Word contains a list of the files stored on the mobile computer. Tap a file in the list to open it.
To delete, make copies of, or send a file, tap and hold a file in the list. Then, select the appropriate
action on the pop-up menu.
Select the type of folder you
want displayed in the list.
Tap to change the sort
order of the list.
Tap to open a document.
Tap and hold an item to see a
pop-up menu of actions.
Tap to create a new item.
Figure 7-15. Using Pocket Word
®
7-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (writing, drawing, typing, and
recording) displayed on the View menu. Tap the Show/Hide Toolbar icon on the command bar to show
or hide each mode’s toolbar.
To change the zoom magnification, tap View - Zoom. Select the percentage. Select a higher
percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of the document.
If you're opening a Word document created on a host computer, tap View - Wrap to Window to see
the entire document.
Typing Mode
more information.
To format or edit text, select the text using the stylus instead of the mouse to drag across the text. To
search a document for the text you want, tap Edit - Find/Replace.
Tap to return to the document
list (changes are saved
Tap and hold to see a pop-
up menu of actions
Tap to change
formatting options
Use buttons to format text
Tap to show or hide the toolbar
Figure 7-16. Formatting Text
Applications
7-23
Writing Mode
In writing mode, use the stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled lines are displayed as a guide,
and the zoom magnification increases to allow you to write more easily. For more information, see
With Space button selected,
drag to insert space. An arrow
appears showing the space
direction and size.
Tap to highlight selected text.
Pen
Space
Tap to select formatting options, such
as pen weight and line color.
button. button.
Figure 7-17. Writing on the Screen in Pocket Word
If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writing becomes a drawing, and can be
edited and manipulated as described in the following section.
Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Word document is converted to a
Word document on the host computer.
Drawing Mode
In drawing mode, use the stylus to draw on the screen. Gridlines appear as a guide. When you lift the
stylus after the first stroke, a drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing. Every subsequent
®
7-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing. For more information, see
Select Shape on the pop-up
menu to convert objects to
proper shapes.
Resize an object by dragging the
selection handles.
Tap to select formatting options, such as
line weight, fill color, and line color.
Tap an arrow to see choices.
Pen button.
Figure 7-18. Drawing on the Screen in Pocket Word
Recording Mode
In recording mode, you may embed a recording into the document. Recordings are saved as .wav files.
For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start - Help.
Applications
7-25
Pocket Excel
Pocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on the host computer to provide easy access to copies of
workbooks. You can create new workbooks on the mobile computer, or copy workbooks from the host
computer to the mobile computer. Synchronize workbooks between the host computer and the mobile
computer so you have up-to-date content in both locations.
To create a new workbook in Pocket Excel, such as an expense report or mileage log, tap Start -
Programs - Pocket Excel - New. A blank workbook appears. Or, if you've selected a template for new
workbooks in the Options dialog box, that template appears with appropriate text and formatting
already provided. You can open only one workbook at a time; when you open a second workbook,
you'll be asked to save the first. You can save a workbook in a variety of formats, including Pocket
Excel (.pxl) and Excel (.xls).
Pocket Excel lists the files stored on the mobile computer. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete,
make copies of, or send a file, tap and hold a file in the list, then select the appropriate action from
the pop-up menu.
Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas, functions, sorting, and
filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View - Toolbar.
Cell contents appear here as
you enter them.
Format button.
AutoSum button.
Zoom button.
Figure 7-19. Using Pocket Excel
If a workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect it with a password. Open the workbook,
tap Edit - Password. Every time you open the workbook, you must enter the password, so choose one
easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess.
®
7-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Tips for Working in Pocket Excel
When working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:
•
View in full-screen mode to see as much of the worksheet as possible. Tap View - Full
Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore.
•
•
Show and hide window elements. Tap View, then the elements you want to show or hide.
Freeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want to freeze panes. Tap View
- Freeze Panes. You may want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep
row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet.
•
•
Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View - Split. Drag the split bar
to where you want it. To remove the split, tap View - Remove Split.
Show and hide rows and columns. To hide a row or column, select a cell in that row or
column. Tap Format - Row or Column - Hide. To show a hidden row or column, tap Tools - Go
To, then type a reference that is in the hidden row or column. Tap Format - Row or Column -
Unhide.
For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start - Help.
Applications
7-27
®
MSN Messenger
With the MSN Messenger instant messaging program on the mobile computer you can:
•
•
•
see who is online
send and receive instant messages
have instant message conversations with groups of contacts.
To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft Passport™ account or a Microsoft Exchange e-mail
account. You need a Passport to use MSN Messenger Service. If you have a Hotmail® or MSN
account, you already have a Passport. Once you have either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft
Exchange account, you can set up an account.
To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start - Programs - MSN Messenger icon.
Setting Up An Account
Before you can connect, set up the Passport or Exchange account and sign in:
1. Tap Tools - Options.
2. Enter an e-mail address and password.
3. Tap Sign In.
If you use MSN Messenger on the host computer, contacts automatically appear on the mobile
computer.
®
7-28 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Working with Contacts
The MSN Messenger window is divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view, while
connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chatting with you, or delete contacts
from the list using the pop-up menu.
Tap a contact to start a chat.
Tap and hold to display a pop-
up menu of actions.
Figure 7-20. MSN Messenger Contacts
To see others online without being seen, tap Tools - My Status - Appear
Offline. You appear offline but remain on the blocked contact's list.
Note
To unblock a contact, tap and hold the contact, then tap Unblock on the pop-
up menu.
Applications
7-29
Chatting with Contacts
Tap a contact name to open a chat window. Enter the message in the text entry area at the bottom of
the screen, or tap My Text to enter a preset message, and tap Send. To invite another contact to a
multi-user chat, tap Tools - Invite and tap the contact you want to invite.
Enter a message.
Tap to send a message.
Figure 7-21. Sending a Message
To switch back to the main window without closing a chat, tap Contacts. To revert back to the chat
window, tap Chats and select the person you were chatting with.
®
7-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
To know if the contact you are chatting with is responding, look for the message under the text entry
area.
View full chat.
View the status of the chat.
Figure 7-22. Receiving a Message
For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start - Help.
Applications
7-31
Windows Media Player
With Windows Media Player on the mobile computer you can play digital audio and video files that
are stored on the mobile computer. To switch to Windows Media Player, tap Start - Windows Media.
Indicates the progress of
the current track.
Slide to adjust volume.
Tap to turn volume on/off.
Tap to skip to the next song.
Tap to play a previous song.
Tap to stop.
Tap to play or pause.
Figure 7-23. Using Windows Media Player
Use the host computer to copy digital audio and video files to the mobile computer. The mobile
computer can play Windows Media and MP3 files.
For more information on using Windows Media Player, tap Start - Help.
®
7-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Microsoft Reader
Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on the mobile computer. Download books to the host computer
from a favorite eBook Web site. Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to the mobile computer.
The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tap them in the list to open them.
Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:
•
Page through the book by using the Up/Down control on the device or by tapping the page
number on each page.
•
•
Annotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings.
Search for text and look up definitions for words.
To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start - Programs - Microsoft Reader.
Getting Books on the Device
You can download book files from the Web. Just visit a favorite eBook retailer and follow the
instructions to download the book files. Use ActiveSync to download the files from the host computer
to the mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder.
Using the Library
The Library is the Reader home page; it displays a list of all books stored on the mobile computer. To
open the Library:
1. On the Reader command bar, tap Library.
2. On a book page, tap the book title, and then tap Library on the pop-up menu.
Applications
7-33
3. To open a book, tap its title in the Library list box.
Tap to scroll through
the Library list.
Tap to select a sort
order.
Tap to open a book.
Tap to specify the
books you want to
display in the list.
Tap here to navigate to
other parts of the Reader.
Reading a Book
Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the pages of the book.
Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of the cover page.
The first time you open a book, you'll probably want to go to the first page or to the table of contents,
if there is one. Subsequently, whenever you open the book, you'll be automatically taken to the last
page read.
®
7-34 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and book title.
Tap to select a navigation
option.
Drag to select text and
then tap an option.
Tap arrows to turn the page,
or tap and hold page # to
bring up page riffle.
You can also page through a book using the Up/Down arrow keys on the keypad of the mobile
computer.
Using Reader Features
Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with paper books. These options
are available from any book page.
•
Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option on the pop-up menu,
as described here:
• Search for Text. Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter the word
you want to search for, and tap the desired Find option. Reader highlights found text on
the page. To close Find, tap outside the box. To return to the original page, tap the title
and then tap Return on the pop-up menu.
• Copy Text. You can copy text from books that support this feature into any program that
accepts text. On a book page, select the text you want to copy. Then, tap Copy Text on
the pop-up menu. The text can be pasted into the program you choose.
• Bookmarks. When you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark icon appears
in the right margin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book. Then, from anywhere in
the book, tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page.
• Highlights. When you highlight text, it appears with a colored background.
• Notes. When you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a note pad that appears on
Applications
7-35
top of the book page. A Note icon displays in the left margin. To show or hide the note,
tap the icon.
• Drawings. When you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-left corner of
the page, and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page. Draw by dragging the
stylus.
•
To see a list of a book's annotations, including bookmarks, highlights, text notes, and
drawings, tap Annotations Index on the book's cover page. You can tap an entry in the list
to go to the annotated page.
Removing a Book
When you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space on the mobile computer. If a copy
of the book is stored on the host computer, you can download it again at any time.
To remove a book from the device, tap and hold the title in the Library list, and then tap Delete on the
pop-up menu.
For more information on using Microsoft Reader, tap Start - Help.
®
7-36 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Pocket Internet Explorer
With Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer, you can view Web or Wireless Application Protocol (WAP)
pages in the following ways:
•
During synchronization with the host computer, download favorite links and mobile favorites
stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the host computer.
•
Connect to an Internet service provider (ISP) or network and browse the Web. First create
To select Pocket Internet Explorer, tap Start - Internet Explorer.
Mobile Favorites
Items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on the host
computer are synchronized with the mobile computer. This folder was created automatically when
you installed ActiveSync.
Favorite Links
Synchronization updates the list of favorite links both in the Mobile Favorites folder on the host
computer and in Pocket Internet Explorer on the mobile computer. Unless you mark the favorite link
as a mobile favorite, only the link is downloaded to the mobile computer; you must connect to the ISP
or network to view the content. For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the
host computer.
Creating Mobile Favorites
If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 or later on the host computer, you can download mobile
favorites. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to the mobile computer so you can
view Web pages while disconnected from the ISP and host computer.
Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mobile favorites:
1. In Internet Explorer on the host computer, click Tools - Create Mobile Favorite.
2. To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name field.
3. If desired, select a desired update schedule in Update.
4. Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the Web page to the host
computer.
5. To download the pages linked to the mobile favorite you just created, in Internet Explorer on
the host computer, right-click the mobile favorite, then click Properties. On the Download
Applications
7-37
tab, specify the number of links deep you want to download. To conserve mobile computer
memory, only go one level deep.
6. Synchronize the mobile computer and host computer. Mobile favorites stored in the Mobile
Favorites folder in Internet Explorer are downloaded to the mobile computer.
If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3, you must manually download content to
keep the information updated on the host computer and mobile computer. Before
synchronizing, in Internet Explorer on the host computer, click Tools - Synchronize. Note the
last time content was downloaded to the host computer; if necessary, manually download
content.
You can add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobile favorites. In Internet
Explorer on the host computer, click View - Toolbars - Customize.
Saving Memory on the Mobile Computer
Mobile favorites take up storage memory on the mobile computer. To minimize the amount of memory
used:
•
In the settings for the Favorites information type in ActiveSync options, turn off pictures and
sounds or stop some mobile favorites from downloading. For more information, see
ActiveSync Help.
•
Limit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on the host computer,
right-click the mobile favorite you want to change, then select Properties. On the Download
tab, specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages to download.
Using AvantGo Channels
AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized content and thousands of
popular Web sites. Subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from the mobile computer, then
synchronize with the host computer, or connect to the Internet to download the content. For more
information, visit the AvantGo Web site.
To sign up for AvantGo:
1. In ActiveSync options on the host computer, turn on synchronization for the AvantGo
information type.
2. In Pocket Internet Explorer on the mobile computer, tap the Favorites icon to display a list of
favorites.
3. Tap AvantGo Channels.
®
7-38 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
4. Tap Activate.
5. Follow the directions on the screen. You must synchronize the mobile computer with the host
computer, then tap My Channels to complete setup.
When synchronization is complete, tap AvantGo Channels in the list of favorites to see a few of the
most popular channels. To add or remove channels, tap Add or Remove.
Using Pocket Internet Explorer
With Pocket Internet Explorer, you can browse mobile favorites and channels downloaded to the
mobile computer without connecting to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet through an
ISP or a network connection and browse the Web.
Favorites button
Home button
Refresh button
Back button
Figure 7-24. Pocket Internet Explorer
Applications
7-39
To view mobile favorites and channels, tap Favorites icon to display the list of favorites, then tap the
page you want to view.
Tap the favorite you
want to view.
Tap to add or delete a
folder or favorite link.
Figure 7-25. Mobile Favorites
You'll see the page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with the host computer. If
the page is not on the mobile computer, the favorite is dimmed. Synchronize with the host computer
again to download the page to the mobile computer, or connect to the Internet to view the page.
Browsing the Web
2. Once connected, go to a specific Web page in one of the following ways:
• Tap Favorites, then tap the favorite you want to view.
• In the address bar at the top of the screen, enter the Web address and tap the go button
or tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses.
If you select Pocket Internet Explorer before setting up the network
connections, a screen may appear allowing you to proceed to the connection
settings screen. After you select the settings, you return to Pocket Internet
Note
Explorer.
To add a favorite link while using the mobile computer, go to the Web page you
want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add to Favorites.
®
7-40 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Pictures
Use Pictures to view .jpg format pictures stored on the mobile computer, send pictures to others, view
a slideshow of pictures or set a picture as the background on the Today screen.
Copy Pictures to the Device
You can copy .jpg pictures from the PC and view them in Pictures.
Copy the picture files from the PC to the My Pictures folder, within the My Documents folder on the
mobile computer. For more information on copying files from the PC to the mobile computer, see
ActiveSync Help on the PC.
Edit Pictures
You can rotate, crop, zoom, and adjust the brightness and color contrast of .jpg pictures.
1. Tap
2. Tap
to rotate a picture 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
to crop a picture by dragging and selecting the crop area. Tap outside of the box to
stop cropping.
3. Tap
to display the Zoom panel, from which you can zoom in or out of a picture, or return
a picture to full-screen size.
4. Tap Edit - Brightness and Contrast to adjust the brightness and contrast levels of a picture.
Send Pictures
You can send a .jpg picture to others as an e-mail attachment. The picture is resized to approximately
30 KB, making it easier to send over wireless connections.
1. In Pictures, tap the picture you want to send as an e-mail attachment.
2. Tap Tools - Send via E-mail to create an e-mail message with the picture attached.
Set Picture as Background
You can use one of your own .jpg pictures as the background on the Today screen, and specify how
you want it displayed on the screen, such as adjusting the transparency level.
1. In Pictures, tap the picture you want to set as the background.
2. Tap Tools - Set as Today Wallpaper.
View Pictures
Using Pictures, you can view thumbnails of .jpg pictures stored in the My Pictures folder and select a
picture that you want to see in full-screen view.
Applications
7-41
1. In Pictures, tap the thumbnail of the picture you want to view.
2. Tap
3. Tap
to view pictures stored on a storage card.
to view pictures stored in the My Pictures folder.
View Slideshow of Pictures
You can view .jpg pictures as a slideshow. Pictures displays slides of the pictures shown in thumbnail
view with 5-second intervals between slides.
1. In Pictures, tap
to view pictures as a slideshow.
2. Tap anywhere on the screen to display the Slideshow toolbar, which you can use to pause
the slideshow, rotate the view, and more.
3. Press the left/right controls to move forward or backward through the slides.
®
7-42 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Accessories
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Cradles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Snap-on Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Replacing the Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Four Slot Charge Only Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
®
8-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Magnetic Stripe Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Attaching and Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Serial/USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Using the MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Cable Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Attaching and Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Serial/USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Universal Battery Charger (UBC) Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Inserting and Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Installing the Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Accessories
8-3
Introduction
Series 9000 accessories provide a wide variety of product support capabilities. Accessories include
cradles, keypads, Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR) and Cable Adapter Module (CAM) snap-ons, four
slot spare battery charger, headphone, Multimedia Card (MMC), Secure Device (SD) card, Universal
Battery Charger (UBC) adapter, wall mounting bracket and shelf slide.
Keypads
•
Optional keypads include the interchangeable modular application specific keypads listed
below. The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized
applications.
• 43-key keypad
• 53-key keypad
• 3270 Emulator keypad
• 5250 Emulator keypad
• VT Emulator keypad.
Cradles
•
Single Slot Serial/USB cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and a spare battery.
It also synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through either a serial or a
USB connection.
•
•
Four Slot Charge Only cradle charges the mobile computer main battery.
Four Slot Ethernet cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and synchronizes the
mobile computer with a host computer through an Ethernet connection.
Miscellaneous
•
•
•
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger charges up to four mobile computer spare batteries.
Headphone can be used in noisy environments.
Multimedia Card (MMC) provides secondary non-volatile storage. (An SD card may also be
used.)
•
•
UBC adapter adapts the UBC for use with the MC9000 batteries.
Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide can be used for wall mounting applications.
®
8-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Snap-on Modules
•
MSR snaps on to the mobile computer and adds magstripe read capabilities.
•
CAM snaps on to the mobile computer and is used to connect cables to the mobile computer.
Both of the snap on modules use the cables listed below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC line cord (country-specific) and power supply, charges the mobile computer.
Auto charge cable, charges the mobile computer using a vehicle’s cigarette lighter.
DEX cable, connects the mobile computer to a vending machine.
Serial cable, adds serial communication capabilities.
USB cable, adds USB communication capabilities.
Printer cable, adds printer communication capabilities.
Accessories
8-5
Keypads
The mobile computer has interchangeable modular keypads. The modular keypads can be changed in
the field as necessary to support specialized applications.
Do not remove the keypad while the mobile computer is on and do not operate
the mobile computer with the keypad detached. Follow proper Electro-Static
Discharge (ESD) precautions to avoid damaging the MMC and SD card. Proper
ESD precautions include, but are not limited to, working on an ESD mat and
ensuring that the operator is properly grounded.
Replacing the Keypad
1. Suspend the mobile computer.
2. Remove the two keypad screws. Slide the keypad down and lift up.
Screws
Keypad
Multi Media Card Holder
Figure 8-1. Removing the Keypad
Do not apply more than 4 in-lbs of torque when tightening the keypad screws.
Accessories
8-7
Multi Media Card (MMC) / Secure Device (SD) Card
The MMC provides secondary non-volatile storage. The MMC is located under the keypad (see Figure
8-1).
SD cards are inter-operable with MMC cards and can also be used in MC9000
mobile computers.
Note
Do not remove the keypad while the mobile computer is on and do not operate
the mobile computer with the keypad detached. Follow proper ESD precautions
to avoid damaging the MMC/SD. Proper ESD precautions include, but are not
limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly
grounded.
To insert the MMC/SD:
1. Suspend the mobile computer.
page 8-5).
3. Lift the MMC/SD retaining door.
4. Position the MMC/SD, with the contacts down, into the MMC/SD holder. The MMC/SD
corner notch fits into the holder only one way. Snap the retaining door closed.
MMC/SD
MMC/SD Retaining Door
Figure 8-3. Inserting the MMC/SD
®
8-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Do not apply more than 4 in-lbs of torque when tightening the keypad screws.
Accessories
8-9
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle
This section describes how to set up and use a single Single Slot Serial/USB cradle (Figure 8-4) with
the mobile computer. For serial and USB communication setup procedures see, Chapter 4,
Indicator
LED Bar
Spare
Battery
Charging
Well
Spare
Battery
Spare
Battery
Charging
Well
Spare Battery
Charging LED
Serial Port USB Port Power Port
Figure 8-4. Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle
The Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle has the following attributes:
•
•
Provides 15VDC power for operating the mobile computer.
Provides serial and USB ports for data communication between the mobile computer and a
host computer or other serial devices (e.g., a printer).
•
Synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer. (With
customized or third party software, it can also be used to synchronize the mobile computer
with corporate databases.)
®
8-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
•
•
Charges the mobile computer’s battery.
Charges a spare battery.
Setup
The cradle requires a dedicated port on the host.
Note
Select either serial or USB for communications. Do not connect the cradle to
both serial and USB ports.
Serial Port
Serial Cable
Serial Port
USB Port
Power Port
DC Cable
Power Supply
USB Port
USB Cable
AC Line Cord
Figure 8-5. Single Slot Cradle Power/Serial/USB Connections
Accessories
8-11
Battery Charging Indicators
The the Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle can charge the mobile computer’s main battery and a spare
battery simultaneously.
The mobile computer’s amber charge LED, located in the Indicator LED Bar (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-
charging status indications.
Batteries usually charge in less than four hours.
Table 8-1. Spare Battery LED Charging Indicators
Spare Battery LED
(on cradle)
Indication
No spare battery in well; spare battery not placed correctly; cradle is not powered.
Error in charging; check placement of spare battery.
Spare battery is charging.
Off
Fast Blinking Amber
Slow Blinking Amber
Solid Amber
Charging complete.
®
8-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle
This section describes how to set up and use a Four Slot Ethernet cradle (Figure 8-6) with the mobile
computer. For cradle communication setup procedures see, Ethernet Communication Setup on page
4-13.
Power Port
Ethernet
CommunicationPort
Figure 8-6. Four Slot Ethernet Cradle
Accessories
8-13
The Four Slot Ethernet cradle has the following attributes:
•
•
Provides 12VDC power for operating the mobile computer.
Enables data communication between the mobile computer (up to four) and a host computer,
over an Ethernet network (using a standard 10Base-T Ethernet cable).
•
Synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer. (With
customized or third party software, it can also be used to synchronize the mobile computer
with corporate databases.)
•
Simultaneously charges up to four batteries in the mobile computer.
Setup
The Ethernet cradle must be connected to a power source and to an Ethernet Hub (when
applicable).
Note
DC Cable
To Ethernet Hub
AC Line Cord
Power Supply
Figure 8-7. Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Power Connection
®
8-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Battery Charging Indicators
The mobile computer’s amber charge LED, located in the Indicator LED Bar (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-
charging status indications.
The battery usually charges in less than four hours.
®
8-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
The Four Slot Charge Only cradle has the following attributes:
•
•
Provides 12VDC power for operating the mobile computer.
Simultaneously charges up to four batteries in the mobile computer.
Setup
DC Cable
AC Line Cord
Power Supply
Figure 8-9. Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Power Connection
Battery Charging Indicators
The mobile computer’s amber charge LED, located in the Indicator LED Bar (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-
charging status indications.
The battery usually charges in less than four hours.
®
8-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Setup
DC Cable
AC Cord
Power Supply
Figure 8-11. Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Power Connection
Spare Battery Charging with the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger
2. Insert the battery into a spare battery charging slot and gently press down on the battery to
ensure proper contact.
Battery Charging Indicators
2 for charging status indications.
The battery usually charges in less than four hours.
Table 8-2. Spare Battery LED Charging Indicators
LED
Indication
Off
Fast Blinking Amber
No spare battery in slot; spare battery not placed correctly; cradle is not powered.
Error in charging; check placement of spare battery.
Accessories
8-19
Table 8-2. Spare Battery LED Charging Indicators (Continued)
LED
Slow Blinking Amber
Solid Amber
Indication
Spare battery is charging.
Charging complete.
Magnetic Stripe Reader
This section describes how to set up and use the snap-on MSR with the mobile computer. The MSR
snaps on to the bottom of the mobile computer and can be easily removed when not in use.
Latches
Card Reader Slot
Pogo Pin Pass-through
Connector
Latch Grip
Communications Port
Power Port
Figure 8-12. Magnetic Stripe Reader
®
8-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
When attached to the mobile computer, the MSR has the following attributes:
•
•
Provides power for operating the mobile computer, with the appropriate power connection.
Allows the mobile computer to capture data from magnetic stripe cards. (To download MSR
•
•
•
Provides serial connection through the serial pass-through port for communication with a
serial device, such as a host computer. For communication setup procedures, see Serial
Provides USB connection through the USB pass-through port for communication with a USB
device, such as a host computer. For communication setup procedures, see Serial
Charges the mobile computer’s battery, when used with the appropriate power supply.
Attaching and Removing
To attach, snap the MSR onto the bottom of the mobile computer.
Latch Grip
(one on each side)
Figure 8-13. Attaching the MSR
Accessories
8-21
To remove, squeeze the latch grips and pull the MSR from the mobile computer.
Remove the MSR from the bottom of the mobile computer before using a cradle for
charging and communication.
Note
Setup
Cigarette Lighter
OR
Vehicle Power Supply
AC Power Supply
Figure 8-14. MSR Power Connection
Serial Port
To Device Serial/
USB Port
Figure 8-15. MSR Serial/USB Connection
®
8-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Battery Charging Indicators
To charge the mobile computer’s battery through the MSR, connect the power supply to the MSR (see
Figure 8-14 on page 8-21), then attach the MSR to the mobile computer. The mobile computer begins
charging automatically.
The mobile computer’s amber charge LED, located in the Indicator LED Bar (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-
charging status indications.
The battery usually charges in less than four hours, if the mobile computer is not in use.
Serial/USB Connection
The MSR can connect to and communicate with a serial/USB device, such as a printer or host
communication setup procedure.
To connect the MSR to a serial/USB device, connect one end of the serial device cable into the serial
port on the MSR and the other end into the serial/USB port on the device.
Using the MSR
The MSR9000 sample application is designed to work with the MSR. This sample application
The MSR does not need to be attached to the power supply to read magnetic
stripes.
Note
To use the MSR:
2. Power on the mobile computer.
3. Tap Start - 9000 Demo - Test Apps - MSR 9000 or MSR Cameo to start the sample
application.
4. Swipe the magnetic stripe card through the MSR, ensuring the magnetic stripe on the card
faces the mobile computer. The card may be swiped in either direction, from left to right or
Accessories
8-23
from right to left. For best results, gently press down on the card while swiping to ensure
contact with the bottom of the reader.
Figure 8-16. Magnetic Stripe Card Swiping
®
8-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Cable Adapter Module
This section describes how to set up and use the snap-on CAM with the mobile computer. The CAM
snaps on to the bottom of the mobile computer and can be easily removed when not in use.
Latches
Pogo Pin Pass-through
Connector
Latch Grip
Communications Port
Power Port
Figure 8-17. Cable Adapter Module
When attached to the mobile computer, the CAM can perform the following functions.
•
•
Provides power for operating the mobile computer, with the appropriate power connection.
Provides serial connection through the serial pass-through port for communication with a
serial device, such as a host computer. For communication setup procedures, see Serial
•
•
Provides USB connection through the USB pass-through port for communication with a USB
device, such as a host computer. For communication setup procedures, see Serial
Charges the mobile computer’s battery, when used with the appropriate power supply.
Accessories
8-25
Attaching and Removing
To attach, snap the CAM onto the bottom of the mobile computer.
Latch Grip
(one on each side)
Figure 8-18. Attaching the CAM
To remove, squeeze the latch grips and pull the CAM from the mobile computer.
Remove the CAM from the bottom of the mobile computer before using a cradle for
charging and communication.
Note
®
8-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Setup
Cigarette Lighter
OR
Vehicle Power Supply
AC Power Supply
Figure 8-19. CAM Power Connection
Serial Port
To Device Serial/
USB Port
Figure 8-20. CAM Serial Connection
Battery Charging Indicators
To charge the mobile computer’s battery through the CAM, connect the power supply to the CAM (see
Figure 8-19 on page 8-26), then attach the CAM to the mobile computer. The mobile computer begins
charging automatically.
Accessories
8-27
The mobile computer’s amber charge LED, located in the Indicator LED Bar (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-
charging status indications.
The battery usually charges in less than four hours, if the mobile computer is not in use.
Serial/USB Connection
The CAM can connect to and communicate with a serial/USB device, such as a printer or host
communication setup procedure.
To connect the CAM to a serial/USB device, connect one end of the serial device cable into the serial
port on the CAM and the other end into the serial/USB port on the device.
®
8-28 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Universal Battery Charger (UBC) Adapter
This section describes how to use the UBC adapter to charge a spare battery.
The UBC can be used with a power supply as a standalone spare battery charger or it can be used
with the four station UBC2000 to provide charging to simultaneously charge up to four spare
batteries. For additional information about the UBC2000, see the UBC 2000 Universal Battery Charger
Product Guide (p/n 70-33188-xx).
Battery
Battery Release
Battery Well
UBC Adapter
POWER
READY or STANDBY or FAULT
(SolidYellow)
(Green)
(FlashingYellow)
CHARGING
(SolidYellow)
Figure 8-21. UBC Adapter
Inserting and Removing a Battery
Insert the battery into the battery well with the charging contacts facing down (over charging pins)
and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact.
To remove the battery, press the battery release and lift battery out of the well.
Accessories
8-29
Setup
DC Cable
AC Line Cord
Power Supply
Figure 8-22. UBC Adapter Power Connection
Battery Charging Indicators
To charge a spare battery using the UBC adapter, connect the power supply to the UBC (see Figure 8-
22 on page 8-29), then insert the spare battery. The spare battery begins charging automatically.
The UBC’s charge LEDs (see Figure 8-23)) show the status of the battery charging in the adapter. Table
8-3 shows battery charging status indications.
®
8-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
The battery usually charges in three hours.
POWER
READY or STANDBY or FAULT
(SolidYellow)
(Green)
(FlashingYellow)
CHARGING
(SolidYellow)
Figure 8-23. UBC Adapter LEDs
Table 8-3. UBC Adapter Charge LED Status Indications
LED
POWER
Indication
Green
Description
Power is connected to the UBC Adapter.
READY or
Green
Charging complete.
STANDBY or
Flashing-
Yellow
The battery was deeply discharged and is being trickle charged to bring the voltage up
to the operating level. After operating level voltage is achieved the battery charges
normally.
FAULT
Yellow
Yellow
Charging error, check placement of mobile computer/spare battery.
Normal charge.
CHARGING
Accessories
8-31
Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide
This section describes how to install and set up the MC9000 Wall Mount Bracket and Shelf Slide to
mount cradles to a wall.
Wall Mounting
Bracket
Shelf Slides
Mounts one single slot cradle
Mounts two single slot cradles
Figure 8-24. Wall Mounting Bracket with Shelf Slide
When installed on a wall, the mounting bracket and shelf slide enable mounting one or two single
slot cradles to a wall. Use two brackets to mount a four slot cradle.
Figure 8-25. Mounted Single Slot Cradle With Power Connection
®
8-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Installing the Wall Mount Bracket
To install the wall mount bracket for use with one or two single slot cradles or four slot chargers,
place the smaller surface of the bracket against the wall or vertical support structure, and secure with
four 1/4” screws (use two of the three screw holes in each row).
Insert screws
Insert screws
Figure 8-26. Wall Mounting Bracket Mounting Screws
If using the bracket and slide with a four slot cradle, secure a second bracket to the wall next to the
first, aligning the horizontal screw holes on the second with those of the first.
Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wall Mount Bracket
One Single Slot Cradle/Four Slot Battery Charger
To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with one single slot cradle or four slot
battery charger:
1. Place the slide on the bracket, aligning the larger pan-head screw holes in the slide with the
center two screw holes on the bracket.
Accessories
8-33
2. Secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan-head screws provided from below
the bracket, up through the bracket’s screw holes and then through the slide’s pan-head
screw holes.
Pan-head Screw Holes
Insert screws from below
Figure 8-27. Attaching One Shelf Slide
Two Single Slot Cradles/Four Slot Battery Chargers
To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with two single slot cradles or two four
slot battery chargers:
1. Place the slide on the bracket, aligning the larger pan-head screw holes in the slide with the
left or right two screw holes on the bracket.
2. Secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan-head screws provided from below
the bracket, up through the bracket’s screw holes and then through the slide’s pan-head
screw holes.
®
8-34 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
3. Secure a second slide to the remaining two screw holes on the bracket in the same manner.
Pan-head
screw holes
Insert screws from below
Figure 8-28. Attaching Two Shelf Slides
Four Slot Cradle
To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with a four slot cradle:
1. Place a slide on the left-hand bracket, aligning the larger pan-head screw holes in the slide
with the left two screw holes on the bracket.
2. Secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan-head screws provided from below
the bracket, up through the bracket’s screw holes and then through the slide’s pan-head
screw holes.
3. Place a slide on the right-hand bracket, aligning the larger pan-head screw holes in the slide
with the right two screw holes on the bracket.
4. Secure the second slide to the bracket as described in Step 2.
Installing the Cradle/Charger on the Bracket
Install the cradle or charger onto the bracket, inserting the bracket’s slide into the grooves on the
bottom of the cradle/charger and sliding the cradle/charger into the desired position.
Accessories
8-35
For one single slot cradle/four slot charger, center it on the bracket.
Slide grooves on bottom of
cradle/charger over bracket
slide
Figure 8-29. Attaching Two Shelf Slides
For two single slot cradle/four slot chargers, slide one onto the left-hand slide, and one onto the right-
hand slide.
Insert set screws
Figure 8-1. Attaching Two Shelf Slides
For a four slot cradle, slide the cradle on to the slides, across both brackets.
Secure each cradle or charger to its slide using the two set screws provided.
®
8-36 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Software Installation on Development PC
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 3
Required System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
SMDK for eVC4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
SMDK for .NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
DCP for MC9000w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Installing Other Development Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
®
9-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Software Installation on Development PC
9-3
To develop applications to run on the mobile computer, one or more of the following is required:
•
•
•
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for Embedded Visual C 4.0 (eVC4)
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET
Device Configuration Package (DCP) for MC9000w.
The SMDK for eVC4 is a development tool used to create native C and C++ applications for all Symbol
mobile computers running the Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating
system. It includes documentation, header files (.H), and library files (.LIB) for native code application
development that targets Symbol value-add APIs.
The SMDK for .NET provides all of the tools necessary to develop C# and VB.NET managed
applications for Symbol mobile computers. These tools include class libraries, sample applications,
and associated documentation. SMDK for .NET allows Microsoft .NET Compact Framework
developers to programmatically access Symbol value-add features of the mobile devices.
The DCP for MC9000w provides the Product Reference Guide (PRG), flash partitions, Terminal
Configuration Manager (TCM) and the associated TCM scripts. With this package hex images that
represent flash partitions can be created and downloaded to the mobile computer.
Required System Configurations
The minimum system configuration required to install the SMDK for eVC4, SMDK for .NET and DCP
for MC9000w is:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IBM-compatible host computer with Pentium 450 MHz processor or higher
Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system
128 MB RAM
100 MB available hard disk space
CD-ROM drive
One available serial port
Mouse
ActiveSync software, available at the Microsoft web site:
®
9-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
SMDK for eVC4
Installation Requirements
In order to install the SMDK for eVC4, the following additional components must first be installed on
the development PC:
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 2000
Microsoft Embedded Visual C++ v4.0 with SP2
Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 SDK
Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.7 or higher
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® 3.0 or higher.
SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations
Table 9-1. SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations
Components
Directory Location
API Help file and Readme
file
\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1.1 for eVC4\
Sample applications for
quick-start development
\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1.1 for eVC4\Samples\evc\
\Program Files\Windows CE Tools\wce420\Pocket PC 2003\Include\armv4
Header files with API
prototypes and structures *
Import Library files*
Start Menu
Readme
\Program Files\Windows CE Tools\wce420\Pocket PC 2003\Lib\armv4
\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs
Help
Samples
WEB Updates
* The header files and lib files are time and date stamped so they can be easily identified in the armv4 directories.
The "date" is the date on which the software release was assembled and the time is the version of the release.
For example, a time of 1:00 signifies version 1.0.
Software Installation on Development PC
9-5
SMDK for .NET
Installation Requirements
In order to install the SMDK for .NET, the following additional components must first be installed on
the development PC:
•
•
Remove any SMDK for .NET (Beta 1 or Beta 2) packages prior to installation.
Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003.
SMDK for .NET Contents and Locations
Table 9-2. SMDK for .NET Contents and Location
Components
Directory Location
Class library assemblies \Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio .NET
2003\CompactFrameworkSDK\v1.0.5000\Windows CE
Forms source code
Sample applications
Help files
\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\Source
\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\Samples
\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\Help Files
Updates to native drivers \Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows
CE\DriverUpdates
CAB files
\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows
CE\MassDeployment
DCP for MC9000w
Installation Requirements
The DCP for MC9000w has no additional installation requirements.
®
9-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
DCP for MC9000w Contents and Locations
Table 9-3. DCP Contents and Locations
Components
Directory Location
Files that make up the
flash partitions
Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0\Flash Folders
File used to create
device splash screen
\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0\Flash
Folders\Splash
Hex image - default
location
\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0\Hex Images
Product Reference Guide \Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0
Readme
\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0
Scripts used to
customize flash
partitions
\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0\TCM Scripts
Terminal Configuration Program Files\Symbol\TCM
Manager (TCM)
Tools (ex Keyboard
remap, if any)
\Program Files\Symbol Device Configurations package\MC9000w\v1.0\Tools\kbtool
Start Menu
Readme
PRG
\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs
TCM
WEB Updates
The SMDK for eVC4, SMDK for .NET and DCP for MC9000w are available from the Symbol
Installing Other Development Software
Developing applications for the mobile computer may require installing other development software
such as application development environments on the development PC. Follow the installation
instructions provided with this software.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3
Starting Terminal Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Defining Script Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Creating the Script for the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Opening a New or Existing Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Updating TCM 1.X Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Copying Components to the Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Saving the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Building the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Sending the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
TCM Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
IPL Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Creating a Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Splash Screen Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
®
10-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Working with FFS Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
RegMerge.dll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
CopyFiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Non-FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-3
Terminal Configuration Manager (TCM) is an application used to customize flash file system
partitions for the mobile computer. The most common use is to create an application partition hex file
that contains the customer's application. TCM can also be used to load hex files to the flash memory
of the mobile computer.
The program resident on the mobile computer that receives the hex file and burns it to the flash
memory is called Initial Program Loader (IPL).
The customization of partitions is controlled by TCM scripts. The scripts contain all of the necessary
information for building an image. The script is a list of copy commands specifying the files to copy
from the development computer to the partition.
TCM works with a pair of directory windows, one displaying the script and the other displaying the
source files resident on the development computer. Using standard windows drag and drop
operations, files can be added and deleted from the script window.
The DCP for MC9000w includes scripts used by Symbol Technologies to build the standard factory
installed Platform and Application partitions provided on the mobile computer. The standard Platform
partition contains drivers while the Application partition contains demo applications and optional
components. The standard TCM scripts can be found in the following folder: C:\Program Files\Symbol
Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v1.0\TCM Scripts.
Before creating a script to build a hex image, identify the files required
(system files, drivers, applications, etc.) and locate the files’ source
directories to make the script building process easier.
Note
The required processes for building a hex image in TCM include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Starting TCM
Defining script properties
Creating the script for the hex image
Building the image
Sending the hex image
Creating a splash screen
Flash storage.
®
10-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Starting Terminal Configuration Manager
Click the Windows start menu TCM icon (Symbol Device Configuration Packages, MC9000w v1.0) to
start TCM. The TCM window appears displaying two child windows: Script1 and File Explorer. The
Script1 window contains a newly created script and the File Explorer window contains a file explorer
view used for selecting files to be placed in the script.
Figure 10-1. TCM Startup Window
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-5
The following table lists the components of the TCM window.
Table 10-1. TCM Components
Icon
Component
Script Window
Function
Displays the files to be used in the creation of the partition(s).
Used to select the files to be added to the script.
Create a new script file.
File Explorer Window
Create button
Open button
Open an existing script file.
Save button
Save the current script file.
Large icons button
Small icons button
List button
View the current script items as large icon.
View the current script items as small icon.
View the current script items as a list.
View the current script items with more details.
Display version information for TCM.
Details button
About button
®
10-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 10-1. TCM Components (Continued)
Icon
Component
Function
Properties button
View/change the current script properties.
Build button
Check button
Send button
Tile button
Build the current script into a set of hex files.
Check the script for errors (files not found).
Download the hex image to the terminal.
Arrange the sub-windows in a tiled orientation.
Build and Send
Build the current script into a set of hex images and send the hex
images to the mobile computer.
Preferences button
View/change the global TCM options.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-7
Defining Script Properties
Before a script is created, the script properties must be defined. This defines the type of terminal,
flash type, number of disks being created and the memory configuration of each disk partition.
To define the script properties:
1. Select the Script window to make it active.
2. Click the Properties button. The Script Properties window - Partition Data tab appears.
Figure 10-2. Script Properties Window - Partition Data Tab
3. In the Terminal drop-down list, the MC9000w v1.0 64M entry is already selected.
4. Use the default Flash Type.
5. In the Disks drop-down list, select the number of disk partitions to create.
6. Select the (memory) Size for each partition. Note that adding space to one disk. partition
subtracts it from another.
7. In the Access drop-down list for each disk partition, determine and select the Read/Write
access option.
®
10-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
8. Click the Options tab. The Script Properties window - Options tab appears.
Figure 10-3. Script Properties Window - Options Tab
9. Set the paths for the Script File, Flash File and Hex File Build.
10. Click OK.
Creating the Script for the Hex Image
On start-up, TCM displays the TCM window with the Script1 window and File Explorer window
pointing to the following directory:
\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\MC9000w\v0.1\TCMScripts\
The Script1 window directory pane displays two partitions: Platform and Application. Depending on
the type of flash chip, the number of partitions may change. Files can be added to each of the
partitions. TCM functionality includes:
•
•
•
Opening a new or existing script file
Copying components to the script window
Saving the script file.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-9
Opening a New or Existing Script
A script file can be created from scratch or based on an existing script file. Click Create to create a
new script or click Open to open an existing script (for example, a script provided in the DCP for
MC9000w). If an existing script is opened and changes are made, saving the changes overwrites the
original script. To use an original or Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes
in a new script, use the Save As function to save the script using a different file name.
Updating TCM 1.X Scripts
Script files that were created with older versions of TCM can be upgraded to TCM 2.0 scripts. Click
Open to open an existing script created with an older version of TCM. The Conversion window
appears automatically.
Figure 10-4. Conversion Window - Upgrading to TCM 2.0
Copying Components to the Script
Script contents are managed using standard file operations such as New Folder, Delete and Rename.
Items can be added to the script by clicking files and folders in the File Explorer window and dragging
them to the Script window. The File Explorer window supports standard windows; multiple files may
be selected by clicking while holding the SHIFT or CTRL keys.
Saving the Script
Modifications to a script file can be saved using the Save or the Save As function. Saving changes to
an existing script writes over the original script. To use a Symbol-supplied standard script as a base
and save the changes in a new script, use the Save As function.
®
10-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Building the Image
Once the script is created, the hex image defined by the script can be built.
As part of the build, TCM performs a check on the script which verifies that all files referenced in the
script exist. This check is important for previously created scripts to ensure that files referenced in
the script are still in the designated locations.
To build scripts:
1. Click Build on the TCM toolbar. The Configure Build window appears.
Figure 10-5. Configure Build Window
2. Select the items (partitions) to build using the check box(es) to the left of each named
partition.
3. The Build Path defines where to store all built partitions.
4. Select (hex image) COMPRESSION to reduce the size and speed up the download.
5. Click OK and follow the on-screen instructions.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-11
If one of the partitions being built is the ESSID, a prompt appears requesting the ESSID
value. Deselect the HR (High Rate) check box when building ESSID images for a device with
an FH radio.
Figure 10-6. Build ESSID Partition Window
If one of the partitions being built is the Splash Screen, a prompt appears requesting both
the source Bitmap file and the destination HEX file.
6. A check is performed and if there are no errors, the partition hex files are created.
If the build fails, the hex files are not be created and TCM displays an error message. Two of the most
common reasons for a build failure are:
•
Files defined in the script can not be found. This error can occur when the files referenced
by the script are no longer stored on the development computer or the folders where they
are stored were renamed.
•
The total amount of flash memory space required by the script exceeds the image size. To
correct this, reduce the number of files in the partition or increase the size of the partition.
size appropriately.
Sending the Hex Image
Once the hex file is built, it can be downloaded to the mobile computer.
To load the hex files on to the mobile computer:
1. For downloads using a serial connection, connect the mobile computer to the development
computer using the Single Slot Serial/USB cradle or CAM.
2. Press and hold the left scan button or the scan trigger and the Power button simultaneously
until the mobile computer resets into IPL.
®
10-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
The mobile computer must be inserted in the cradle or attached to the CAM,
both with their appropriate power supplies connected to a power source, for
the mobile computer to reset into IPL.
Note
3. When the Initial Program Loader menu appears, release scan button/trigger and Power
button.
Initial Program Loader
Platform
Application
PRIMFIRM
SECFIRM
ESSID
Config Block
Windows CE
Monitor
Splash Screen
Power Micro
Partition Table
System Reset
Auto Select
Figure 10-7. Initial Program Loader (IPL) Menu
To insure a successful download, do not remove power from the mobile
computer while in IPL mode.
CAUTION
4. Choose Auto Select or use the up and down scroll buttons to select the partition to
download, then press Enter.
Table 10-2. IPL Menu Partitions
Partition Name
Platform
Description
Contains the files in the Platform folder.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-13
Table 10-2. IPL Menu Partitions (Continued)
Partition Name
Application
Description
Contains the files in the Application folder.
PRIMFIRM
SECFIRM
ESSID
Contains the primary radio firmware for the Spectrum24 HR radio card.
Note: These partitions must be loaded to use wireless downloads through IPL with the HR
radio. They are only used by IPL and are not required by the Operating System or the S24 FH
radios.
Contains the secondary radio firmware for the Spectrum24 HR radio card.
Note: These partitions must be loaded to use wireless downloads through IPL with the HR
radio. They are only used by IPL and are not required by the Operating System or the S24 FH
radios.
Identifies the ESSID, used for wireless downloads.
Note: This partition specifies the ESSID to be used for IPL downloads via all S24 radios. If the
partition is not present, then an ESSID of 101 is assumed. This partition is only used by IPL and
is not required by the Operating System.
Config Block
Contains information to correctly configure the Operating System for the mobile computer. This
information is loaded by the manufacturer.
Note: Great care should be taken to ensure that an incorrect config block is not loaded into the
mobile computer. Loading an incorrect config block prevents the correct operation of the
computer.
Windows CE
Monitor
Contains the operating system for the mobile computer.
Contains the Monitor and IPL programs.
Splash Screen
Contains the splash screen that displays while booting the mobile computer.
Note: Splash screens are generated from .bmp images and must be less than or equal to 240
pixels wide and 296 pixels deep. For mono displays, the bmp image must be 4 bpp and for color
screens the color depth must be 8 bpp. Note: 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen
images. Once Windows CE is running, the color density is 16 bits per pixel.
Power Micro
The Power Micro is a small computer contained within the mobile computer that controls
several system resources. In the unlikely event that the Power Micro Firmware needs updating,
selecting this item allows the device to be programmed.
Partition Table
Contains the partition information for all other partitions.
Note: The partition table should never need changing unless the sizes of the platform and
application images are changed within TCM. If this is done, then the new partition table should
be loaded first, followed by both platform and application in any order.
System Reset
Selecting this item provides a simple method to exit IPL and to boot the operating system.
®
10-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 10-2. IPL Menu Partitions (Continued)
Partition Name
Auto Select
Description
Selecting this item allows one or more files to be downloaded without having to manually
select the destination. (The content of the files being downloaded automatically directs the file
to the correct destination.) For technical reasons, Auto Select cannot be used to download
Monitor, Power Micro, or Partition Table. These items must be specifically selected.
If the platform or application partition sizes are changed, you must download
a new partition table first.
Note
5. IPL displays the Select Transport menu which lists the available methods of downloading the
file.
Select Transport
Wireless S24 XX
Serial
Previous
Top
Figure 10-8. Select Transport Menu
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-15
If the mobile computer does not have a radio, then the WirelessS24XX
selection is not available on the Transport menu.
Note
6. Use the up and down scroll buttons to select the method of transport, then press Enter.
7. If you selected the Serial transport method, the Baud Rate Menu appears.
Baud Rate Menu
115200
57600
38400
19200
9600
Previous
Top
Figure 10-9. Baud Rate Menu
8. Use the up and down scroll buttons to select the appropriate baud rate, then press Enter.
®
10-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
9. If you selected the Wireless S24XX transport method, the Address Configuration menu
appears.
Address Configuration
DHCP
Previous
Top
Figure 10-10. Address Configuration Menu
For wireless downloads, the ESSID partition must be loaded with the correct
ESSID.
Note
10. Use the up and down scroll buttons to select DHCP, then press Enter.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-17
11. The Download File? menu appears.
Download File?
Download
Cancel
Show Parms
Previous
Top
Figure 10-11. Download File? Menu
®
10-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
12. Use the up and down scroll buttons to select Show Parms to verify the file to download.
Press Enter to display the Parameters screen.
Download:
"Partition Name" via
"Device Parameters"
Press Enter to Continue
Figure 10-12. Parameters Screen
Partition Name is the name of the partition selected in the Initial Program Loader menu.
Device Parameters is the device selected in the Select Transport menu with the baud rate
for serial downloads, or DHCP address for wireless downloads.
13. Press Enter to return to the Download File? menu.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-19
14. Use the up and down scroll buttons to select Download. Press Enter. The Downloading
screen appears.
Downloading:
Partition Name
Device Parameters
Device Status
Figure 10-13. Downloading Screen
Before the download starts, if Serial was selected in the Select Transport menu, Waiting for
Data appears in the Device Status field. If Wireless S24XX was selected in the Select
Transport menu, the IP address appears in the Device Status field.
15. On the development computer, click Load on the TCM toolbar. The Load Terminal window -
Serial tab appears.
Figure 10-14. Load Terminal Window - Serial and Ethernet Tabs
®
10-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
16. For Serial port connections, click the Serial tab and select the Image Files To Load, Comm
Port and Baud Rate from their respective drop-down lists.
For Wireless connections, click the Ethernet tab. A list of available devices and their IP
addresses appear. Only those devices placed into the Wireless transport mode of IPL appear
in this dialog. Select the files to download and the device to receive the files. To load a
device, the status must be "Active."
17. Click Download to begin the operation.
18. During download, the Downloading screen on mobile computer displays the Device Status
and a progress bar.
19. When complete, Device Status displays Result was Success, or in the case of an error, the
cause of the error.
20. On completion, press Enter to return to the IPL menu to select the next partition to
download.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-21
TCM Error Messages
TCM validates the cells in the partition table when the Execute button is clicked. Cells highlighted in
red contain an error. Partition loading is disabled until all errors are corrected.
Table 10-3. TCM Error Messages
Error
Description/Solution
Failed to build images: flash file TCM could not load the DLL required to build images for the targeting flash file
system DLL not loaded!
Failure finding directory xxx
Failure creating volume
system. Reinstall TCM or recover the DLL.
Building process failed because directory xxx was not found.
Building process failed because a certain disk volume could not be created.
Build process failed because TCM failed to add a certain system file to the disk image.
Failure adding system file to
image
INVALID PATH
The path for the image file to build is not valid.
Nothing Selected To Build
Illegal ESS ID
In the Config Build window, no item is selected to build.
In the Build ESSID Partition window, no ESS ID was entered or the ESS ID entered was
illegal.
Disk Full
TCM failed to create Hex image file at the selected path. Check available disk space.
Target Disk Full
Build process failed because TCM failed to add file to the image of a disk volume.
Remove some files or increase the disk size.
Hex file is READ ONLY
The Hex image file to be created exists and is read-only. Delete the existing file or
change its attribute.
Error opening the file xxx with
write access
TCM could not open file xxx with write access. Check if file is in use.
Failure creating binary file
TCM failed to open/create an intermediate binary file.
Hex File To load is missing or
invalid
In Load Terminal window, the file selected to load has invalid status.
Could not locate terminal name in While loading the Script Properties window, TCM could not find the TCM.ini section
TCM.ini file
corresponding to the terminal type specified by the current opening script. Either
TCM.ini or the script file is invalid.
Incorrect disk sizes in TCM.ini file The total disk size specified in the script does not match the total disk size defined in
the corresponding TCM.ini section. Check if the script is corrupt or the TCM.ini has
changed after the script was created.
INVALID DIRECTORY
In Script Properties window, the selected System File Path is not a valid directory.
®
10-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 10-3. TCM Error Messages (Continued)
Error
Description/Solution
One of the disk sizes is one sector In Script Properties window, one of the disks is too small (one sector in size). This may
in size
cause problem while building images, especially when cushion is enabled. Increase
the disk size.
INVALID VOLUME NAME
In Script Properties window, one of the volume labels is not valid.
Corrupt TCM.INI file! (Invalid
value of VolumeDivisor)
The VolumeDivisor entry is missing or invalid in the TCM.ini. Reinstall TCM or recover
TCM.ini.
Invalid version of TCM script file The TCM script was not created by this version of TCM.
Corrupt or missing TCM.ini file
TCM could not find TCM.ini file.
FAILED CONNECTION TO COM
PORT (Could not get status)
While downloading images to terminal, TCM failed to connect to the selected COM
port. Check if the COM port is free and is properly configured.
FAILED CONNECTION TO
TERMINAL (Terminal Not
While downloading images, TCM failed to connect to the terminal. Check if the
correct flow control protocol is selected and the terminal is properly connected and is
Connected Properly/Terminal Not in a listening state.
Ready to Receive)
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-23
IPL Error Detection
While receiving data, IPL performs many checks on the data to ensure that the data is received
correctly. If an error is detected, IPL immediately aborts the download, and reports the error on an
error screen.
Error screens may vary depending on the action being performed. A sample error screen may look like
the screen pictured below:
Downloading:
Platform
via Serial Port 115200
Error # -2 : Messages:
Cancelled by user
Press any key to continue
Figure 10-15. IPL Error Screen
This error message screen displays until you press any key. Once the screen is acknowledged, IPL
returns to the Initial Program Loader main menu to wait for a new selection.
To find the probable cause of the error, use the error number and/or the error text displayed on the
.
Table 10-4. IPL Errors
Error Text
Unknown error
Error Number
Probable Cause
-1
A general error occurred. Retry the download. If the
failure persists, it is most likely due to a hardware
failure; the terminal requires servicing.
Cancelled by user
-2
The user canceled the download.
®
10-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 10-4. IPL Errors (Continued)
Error Text
Error Number
Probable Cause
Can't open the source
-7
An error occurred opening the source device (either
radio card or Serial port). Check source device
connectivity and retry.
Can't open the destination
-8
An error occurred opening the destination device
(either flash ROM or Power Micro). Retry the
download. If the failure persists, it is most likely due
to a hardware failure; the terminal requires servicing.
Can't read from the source device
-9
The source device (either radio card or Serial port)
could not be read from. Check source device
connectivity and retry.
Can't write to the destination
device
-10
The destination device (either flash ROM or Power
Micro) could not be written to. Retry the download. If
the failure persists, it is most likely due to a hardware
failure; the terminal requires servicing.
Transmission checksum error
Readback checksum error
-11
-12
-14
An error occurred during transmission from the source
device (either radio card or Serial port) and the
checksum check failed. Check source device
connectivity and retry.
A checksum, generated from reading back data that
was written to the destination device, was incorrect.
An error during transmission or a write error to the
destination device could cause this.
There is no more heap space
available
There is no more heap space available for the
download procedure. Restart IPL and retry the
download. If the failure persists, contact service with
details of what is being downloaded.
Insufficient data available to
complete record
-21
-23
-24
A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the
HEX file is invalid. Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file
format.
Invalid Symbol HEX file
A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the
HEX file is invalid. Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file
format.
Unrecognized or unsupported HEX
record
The Symbol HEX file being downloaded contains an
invalid or unrecognized HEX record. Ensure the file is
in proper Symbol HEX file format.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-25
Table 10-4. IPL Errors (Continued)
Error Text
Error Number
Probable Cause
Invalid data in HEX file
-25
The Symbol HEX file being downloaded contains
invalid data. Ensure the file is in proper Symbol HEX
file format with valid HEX data.
Exceeded max size
-26
-27
-28
The download file is too large to fit into the space
allocated for it. Either make the file smaller or increase
the space allocated for it by altering the partition
table.
Partition is not valid on this device
Wrong destination code
The downloaded file specifies a partition entry that
does not exist on the device. Only download files that
are valid for this device, or change the partition table
so that the new file is valid on the device.
A specific partition was chosen from the Main Menu
(not Auto Select) but the file selected for download
was for another partition. Ensure that the partition
selected from the Main Menu matches the file
selected for download.
File type does not support IPL Auto
Select
-29
-30
-31
-32
-33
-34
Monitor, Power Micro and Partition Table cannot be
loaded with Auto Select. Select the appropriate area,
and try again.
Non-contiguous record found
Timed Out - No data
Fail: Buffer Overrun
A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the
HEX file is invalid. Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file
format.
IPL was waiting for data from the source device but
timed out before receiving any. Check the source
device connectivity and retry.
The serial port device could not keep up with incoming
data. Retry the serial download with a lower baud
rate.
Partition Table not Valid
Invalid file format
The size of flash memory is different than that
described in the partition table. Retry the download
with the correct partition table file.
The file format is invalid. Only Symbol HEX files are
supported by IPL.
®
10-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Creating a Splash Screen
The source bitmap files used to create the default splash screens for the mobile computer are
supplied with the DCP for MC9000w. These files can be modified using any of the standard windows
image editors, allowing customization for particular customers.
To create a custom splash screen, perform the following steps:
1. For mobile computers with monochrome screens, open the Splashmono.bmp file supplied
with the DCP for MC9000w using an image editor.
2. For mobile computers with color screens, open the Splashcolor.bmp file supplied with the
DCP for MC9000w using an image editor.
3. Modify the bitmap file and save.
Splash Screen Format
If the default files are not used to create the new splash screens, be sure to preserve the image
format. The formats are as follows:
Table 10-5. Splash Screen Format
Screen Type
Monochrome
Color
Dimensions
240x296
240x296
Color Format
4 bits per pixel
8 bits per pixel*
* 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images. Once Windows CE
is running, the color density is 16 bits per pixel.
and IPL.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-27
Flash Storage
In addition to the RAM-based storage standard on Windows CE terminals, the mobile computer is
also equipped with a non-volatile Flash-based storage area which can store data (partitions) that can
not be corrupted by a cold boot. This Flash area is divided into two categories: Flash File System (FFS)
Partitions and Non-FFS Partitions.
FFS Partitions
The mobile computer includes two FFS partitions. These partitions appear to the mobile computer as
a hard drive that the OS file system can write files to and read files from. Data is retained even if
power is removed.
The two FFS partitions appear as two separate folders in the Windows CE file system and are as
follows:
•
•
Platform: The Platform FFS partition contains Symbol-supplied programs and Dynamic Link
Libraries (DLLs). This FFS is configured to include DLLs that control system operation. Since
these drivers are required for basic mobile computer operation, only experienced users
should modify the content of this partition.
Application: The Application FFS partition is used to store application programs needed to
operate the mobile computer.
Working with FFS Partitions
Because the FFS partitions appear as folders under the Windows CE file system, they can be written
to and read like any other folder. For example, an application program can write data to a file located
in the Application folder just as it would to the Windows folder. However, the file in the Application
folder is in non-volatile storage and is not lost on a cold boot (e.g., when power is removed for a long
period of time).
Standard tools such as ActiveSync can be used to copy files to and from the FFS partitions. They
appear as the “Application” and “Platform” folders to the ActiveSync explorer. This is useful when
installing applications on the mobile computer. Applications stored in the Application folder are
retained even when the mobile computer is cold booted, just as the Demo 9000 program is retained
in memory.
There are two device drivers included in the Windows CE image to assist developers in configuring
the mobile computer following a cold boot: RegMerge and CopyFiles.
®
10-28 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
RegMerge.dll
RegMerge.dll is a built-in driver that allows registry edits to be made to the Windows CE Registry.
Regmerge.dll runs very early in the boot process and looks for registry files (.reg files) in certain Flash
File System folders during a cold boot. It then merges the registry changes into the system registry
located in RAM.
Since the registry is re-created on every cold boot from the default ROM image, the RegMerge driver
is necessary to make registry modifications persistent over cold boots.
RegMerge is configured to look in the root of two specific folders for .reg files in the following order:
\Platform
\Application
Regmerge continues to look for .reg files in these folders until all folders are checked. This allows
folders later in the list to override folders earlier in the list. This way, it is possible to override Registry
changes made by the Platforms partitions folders. Take care when using Regmerge to make Registry
changes. The DCP for MC9000w contains examples of .reg files.
Regmerge only merges the .reg files on cold boots. The merge process is
skipped during a warm boot.
Note
Typically, do not make modifications to registry values for drivers loaded before RegMerge. However,
these values may require modification during software development. Since these early loading
drivers read these keys before RegMerge gets a chance to change them, the mobile computer must
be cold booted. The warm boot does not re-initialize the registry and the early loading driver reads
the new registry values.
Do not use Regmerge to modify built-in driver registry values, or merge the same Registry value to
two files in the same folder, as the results are undefined.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-29
CopyFiles
Windows CE expects certain files to be in the Windows folder, residing in volatile storage. Windows
CE maintains the System Registry in volatile storage. CopyFiles copies files from one folder to another
on a cold boot. Files can be copied from a non-volatile partition (Application or Platform) to the
Windows or other volatile partition during a cold boot. During a cold boot CopyFiles looks for files
with a .CPY extension in the root of the Platform and Application FFS partitions (Platform first and
then Application). These files are text files containing the source and destination for the desired files
to be copied separated by “>”. The following example from the file application.cpy is contained on
the demo application partition included in the DCP for MC9000w. It can also be obtained from the
Files are copied to the Windows folder from the Flash File System using copy files (*.cpy) in the
following order:
\Platform
\Application
Example:
\Application\ScanSamp2.exe>\Windows\ScanSamp2.exe
This line directs CopyFiles to copy the ScanSamp2.exe application from the \Application folder to the
\Windows folder.
Non-FFS Partitions
Non-FFS Partitions include additional software and data pre-loaded on the mobile computer that can
be upgraded. Unlike FFS Partitions, these partitions are not visible when the operating system is
running. They also contain system information. Non-FFS partitions include the following:
•
Windows CE: The complete Windows CE operating system is stored on Flash devices. If
necessary, the entire OS image may be downloaded to the mobile computer using files
provided by Symbol. The current OS partition on the mobile computer is included as part of
the TCM installation package. Any upgrades must be obtained from Symbol. This partition
is mandatory for the mobile computer.
•
Splash Screen: a bitmap smaller than 16 Kb (and limited to 8 bits per pixel) is displayed as
the mobile computer cold boots. To download a customized screen to display, see Creating
®
10-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images. Once Windows CE is
running, the color density is 16 bits per pixel.
Note
•
IPL: This program interfaces with the host computer and allows downloading via cradle or
serial cable any or all of the partitions listed above, as well as updated versions of IPL. Use
caution downloading updated IPL versions; incorrect downloading of an IPL causes
permanent damage to the mobile computer. IPL is mandatory for the mobile computer.
•
Partition Table: Identifies where each partition is loaded in the mobile computer.
Downloading Partitions to the Terminal
TCM is used to specify a hex destination file for each partition and download each file to the terminal.
This download requires a program loader stored on the terminal. The terminal comes with a program
loading utility, Initial Program Loader (IPL), stored in the terminal's write-protected flash.
IPL
IPL allows the user to upgrade the mobile computer with software updates and/or feature
enhancements.
Partition Update vs. File Update
There are two types of update supported by the mobile computer: partitions and files. The file system
used by the mobile computer is the same as the file system used on a desktop computer. A file is a
unit of data that can be accessed using a file name and a location in the file system. When a file is
replaced, only the contents of the previous file are erased. The operating system must be running for
a file to be updated, so the IPL cannot perform individual file updates as it is a stand-alone program
that does not require the operating system to be running.
A typical partition is a group of files, combined into a single "partition" that represents a specific area
of storage. Examples of partitions are the flash file systems such as Platform or Application. (Using
the desktop computer comparison, these partitions are roughly equivalent to a C: or D: hard disk
drive.) In addition to the "hard disk" partitions, some partitions are used for single items such as the
operating system, monitor, or splash screen. (Again using a desktop computer comparison, these
partitions are roughly the equivalent of the BIOS or special hidden system files.) When a partition is
updated, all data that was previously in its storage region is erased - i.e. it is not a merge but rather
a replacement operation. Typically, the operating system is not running when partitions are update,
so IPL can perform partition updates.
Configuring the Mobile Computer
10-31
Partition images for selected partitions can be created by TCM. All partition images suitable for use
by IPL are in hex file format for transfer by TCM from the development computer to the mobile
computer.
Upgrade Requirements
Upgrade requirements:
•
•
•
The hex files to be downloaded (on development computer)
A connection from the host computer and the mobile computer (either serial or wireless)
TCM (on development computer) to download the files.
Once these requirements are satisfied, the mobile computer can be upgraded by invoking IPL and
hex file to the mobile computer.
®
10-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K- 3
Maintaining the Mobile Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Mobile Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Four Slot Charge Only Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-7
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-8
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10
Cable Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-12
Magnetic Stripe Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-12
®
11-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
11-3
Introduction
This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the mobile computer, and provides
troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during mobile computer operating.
Maintaining the Mobile Computer
For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the mobile computer:
•
Take care not to scratch the screen of the mobile computer. When working with the mobile
computer, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped pens intended for use with a touch-
sensitive screen. Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of
the mobile computer screen.
•
Although the mobile computer is water and dust resistant, do not expose it to rain or
moisture for an extended period of time. In general, treat the mobile computer as you would
a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument.
•
•
The touch-sensitive screen of the mobile computer contains glass. Take care not to drop the
mobile computer or subject it to strong impact.
Protect the mobile computer from temperature extremes. Do not leave it on the dashboard
of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources.
•
•
Do not store or use the mobile computer in any location that is extremely dusty, damp or wet.
Use a soft lens cloth to clean the mobile computer. If the surface of the mobile computer
screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window-cleaning
solution.
®
11-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Troubleshooting
Mobile Computer
Table 11-1. Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer
Problem
Cause
Solution
Mobile computer does not turn Lithium-ion battery not
Charge or replace the lithium-ion battery in the mobile
computer.
on.
charged.
Lithium-ion battery not
installed properly.
Ensure battery is installed properly. See Installing and
System crash.
Perform a warm boot. If the mobile computer still does
not turn on, perform a cold boot. See Resetting the
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Battery failed.
did not charge.
Replace battery. If the mobile computer still does not
operate, try a warm boot, then a cold boot. See
Mobile computer removed
Insert mobile computer in cradle and begin charging.
from cradle while battery was The lithium-ion battery requires less than four hours
charging. to recharge fully.
Cannot see characters on display. Mobile computer not powered Press the Power button.
on.
During data communication, no Mobile computer removed
Replace the mobile computer in the cradle, or reattach
data was transmitted, or
transmitted data was
incomplete.
from cradle or unplugged from the Synchronization cable and re-transmit.
host computer during
communication.
Incorrect cable configuration. See the System Administrator.
incorrectly installed or
configured.
details.
No sound is audible.
Volume setting is low or
turned off.
Unit may be a beeper only unit or incorrect Config
Block is programmed into device.
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
11-5
Table 11-1. Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Mobile computer turns itself off. Mobile computer is inactive. The mobile computer turns off after a period of
inactivity. If the mobile computer is running on battery
power, this period can be set from 1 to 5 minutes, in
one-minute intervals. If the mobile computer is
running on external power, this period can be set to 1,
2, 5, 10, 15 and 30 minutes.
Check the Power window by selecting Start - Settings
- System tab and tap the Power icon. Select the
Advanced tab and change the setting if you need a
longer delay before the automatic shutoff feature
activates.
Battery is depleted.
Replace the battery.
Battery is not inserted
properly.
Insert the battery properly (see Installing and
Tapping the window buttons or LCD screen not aligned
icons does not activate the
corresponding feature.
correctly.
The system is hung.
Warm boot the system. To perform a warm boot (see
A message appears stating that Too many files stored on the Delete unused memos and records. You can save
the mobile computer memory is mobile computer.
full.
these records on the host computer.
Too many applications
installed on the mobile
computer.
If you have installed additional applications on the
mobile computer, remove them to recover memory.
Select Start - Settings - System tab and tap the
Remove Programs icon. Select the unused program
and tap Remove.
®
11-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table 11-1. Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer (Continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
The mobile computer does not
accept scan input.
Scanning application is not
loaded.
Verify that the unit is loaded with a scanning
application. See the System Administrator.
Unreadable bar code.
Ensure the symbol is not defaced.
Distance between exit
window and bar code is
incorrect.
Ensure mobile computer is within proper scanning
range.
Mobile computer is not
Ensure the mobile computer is programmed to accept
programmed for the bar code. the type of bar code being scanned.
Mobile computer is not
programmed to generate a
beep.
If a beep on a good decode is expected and a beep is
not heard, check that the application is set to
generate a beep on good decode.
Battery is low.
If the scanner stops emitting a laser beam when the
trigger is pressed, check the battery level. When the
battery is low, the scanner shuts off before the mobile
computer low battery condition notification.
Note: If the scanner is still not reading symbols,
contact the distributor or Symbol Technologies.
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
11-7
Four Slot Charge Only Cradle
Table 11-2. Troubleshooting the Four Slot Charge Only Cradle
Problem
Cause
Solution
Mobile computer charge
indicator LED does not light.
Cradle is not receiving power.
Ensure the power supply is securely connected and
receiving power.
Mobile computer is not seated
correctly in the cradle.
Ensure the battery is properly installed in the mobile
computer, and re-seat the mobile computer in the
cradle.
The battery is not properly
installed in the mobile computer.
The battery in the mobile
computer is faulty.
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so,
replace the faulty battery.
Note: The Four Slot Charge Only Cradle has no power indication.
®
11-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Four Slot Ethernet Cradle
Table 11-3. Troubleshooting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Attempt by the mobile computer Mobile computer removed from Wait one minute and reinsert the mobile computer in
to ActiveSync failed.
the cradle while the LED was
blinking green.
the cradle. This allows the cradle to attempt another
synchronization.
ActiveSync on the host
Wait one minute and reinsert the mobile computer in
computer has not yet closed the the cradle. This allows the cradle to attempt another
previous ActiveSync session.
synchronization.
Incorrect cable configuration.
Check your DHCP server and determine which IP
address was allocated to the cradle, then check
connectivity by pinging the cradle.
Communications software
improperly configured.
Perform setup as described in Chapter 4,
Communications. Check your DHCP server and
determine which IP address was allocated to the
mobile computer slot, then check connectivity by
pinging the cradle.
Mobile computer ActiveSync
disabled or not configured to
accept network connection.
On the mobile computer, tap Start - ActiveSync -
Tools - Options - Options button. Then, uncheck the
Enable PC sync using this connection: check box.
Host ActiveSync disabled or not On the host computer, check File - Connection
configured to accept network
connection.
Settings - Allow network (Ethernet) Server
Connection with this desktop computer.
During communications, no data Mobile computer removed from Replace mobile computer in cradle and retransmit.
was transmitted, or transmitted cradle during communications.
data was incomplete.
Mobile computer has no active An icon will be visible in the status bar if a
connection.
connection is currently active.
Mobile computer has
Data is being transferred over Temporarily disable the radio link to force data
successfully connected through the S24 radio link.
the cradle, but no data is being
transmitted over the
transmission through the cradle. Tap the wireless
LAN icon from the systray on the Today screen.
Tap the Mode/General tab. Enter an in-valid value in
the ESSID: text box and tap the OK button. Power
cycle the mobile computer. Verify that your radio link
has been disabled (the wireless LAN icon has a red
box with a ! on it).
connection.
Once you have completed your data transmission, re-
enable your radio link.
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
11-9
Table 11-3. Troubleshooting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle (Continued)
Symptom
Cause
Solution
All Communication Status LEDs The unit could not configure
Connect the unit to an Ethernet network with a
are flashing red.
itself, or it has lost the lease on correctly functioning DHCP server.
its IP address.
Failed automatic cradle
configuration via local DHCP
service.
Connect a properly configured DHCP server or DHCP
relay agent to the subnet, and power cycle the cradle.
Check the DHCP server log to verify that the cradle is
receiving a response to its DHCP request.
The Ethernet link may be down. Ensure the ethernet cable is connected to an active
hub.
Communication Status LED
does not light up.
Mobile computer has been
inserted incorrectly into the
cradle.
Remove, wait a minute, and then reinsert the mobile
computer, ensuring it fits snugly onto the connector
at the bottom of the cradle.
Cradle is not receiving power.
Ensure the power supply is securely connected and
receiving power.
Battery is not recharging.
Mobile computer removed from Replace the mobile computer into the cradle. It can
the cradle too soon.
take up to 4 hours to recharge a completely depleted
battery pack if mobile computer is suspended or
longer if the mobile computer is on. Tap Start -
Settings - System - Power to view battery status.
Battery is faulty.
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so,
replace the faulty battery.
Mobile computer is not inserted Remove the mobile computer and reinsert it correctly.
correctly into the cradle.
Verify charging is active. Tap Start - Settings - System
- Power to view battery status.
Warning Message - “! Unable to This message occurs if a
obtain a server assigned IP suspend/resume cycle is
address. Try again later or enter performed and the mobile
Tap OK to close the message. The mobile computer
will obtain address information and communicate
through the ethernet cradle.
an IP address in Network
Settings.”
computer radio is not
associated (e.g. due to being out
of range)
®
11-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Four Slot Spare Battery Charger
Table 11-4. Troubleshooting The Four Slot Spare Battery Charger
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Batteries not charging. Battery was removed from the
Ensure MSR is receiving power. Ensure mobile computer is
charger or charger was unplugged attached correctly. Confirm main battery is charging under
from AC power too soon.
Battery is faulty.
Start - Settings - System - Power. If a mobile computer
battery is fully depleted, it can take up to four hours to fully
recharge a battery (if the mobile computer is off and longer
if the mobile computer is operating).
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so, replace
the faulty battery.
Battery contacts not connected to Verify that the battery is seated in the battery well
charger.
correctly with the contacts facing down.
Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle
Table 11-5. Troubleshooting the Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
LEDs do not light when Cradle is not receiving power.
mobile computer or
Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the
cradle and to AC power.
spare battery is
Mobile computer is not seated
inserted.
Remove and re-insert the mobile computer into the cradle,
ensuring it is firmly seated.
firmly in the cradle.
Spare battery is not seated firmly in Remove and re-insert the spare battery into the charging
the cradle.
slot, ensuring it is firmly seated.
Mobile computer
Mobile computer was removed
Ensure cradle is receiving power. Ensure mobile computer
is seated correctly. Confirm main battery is charging under
Start - Settings - System - Power. If a mobile computer
battery is fully depleted, it can take up to four hours to fully
recharge a battery (if the mobile computer is off and longer
if the mobile computer is operating).
battery is not charging. from cradle or cradle was
unplugged from AC power too
soon.
Battery is faulty.
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so, replace
the faulty battery.
The mobile computer is not fully
seated in the cradle.
Remove and re-insert the mobile computer into the cradle,
ensuring it is firmly seated.
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
11-11
Table 11-5. Troubleshooting the Single Slot Serial/USB Cradle (Continued)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Spare battery is not
charging.
Battery not fully seated in charging Remove and re-insert the spare battery into the cradle,
slot.
ensuring it is firmly seated.
Battery inserted incorrectly.
Ensure the contacts are facing down and toward the back
of the cradle.
Battery is faulty.
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so, replace
the faulty battery.
During data
Mobile computer removed from
cradle during communications.
Replace mobile computer in cradle and
retransmit.
communications, no
data was transmitted,
or transmitted data was
incomplete.
Incorrect cable configuration.
See your system administrator.
Communications software is not
installed or configured properly.
Perform setup as described in Serial Communication
®
11-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Cable Adapter Module
Table 11-6. Troubleshooting The Cable Adapter Module
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Mobile computer
Mobile computer was removed
Ensure CAM is receiving power. Ensure mobile computer
battery is not charging. from CAM or CAM was unplugged is attached correctly. Confirm main battery is charging
from AC power too soon.
under Start - Settings - System - Power. If a mobile
computer battery is fully depleted, it can take up to four
hours to fully recharge a battery (if the mobile computer is
off and longer if the mobile computer is operating).
Battery is faulty.
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so, replace
the faulty battery.
The mobile computer is not fully
attached to the CAM.
Detach and re-attach the CAM to the mobile computer,
ensuring it is firmly connected.
During data
Mobile computer detached from
CAM during communications.
Re-attach mobile computer to CAM and retransmit.
communications, no
data was transmitted,
or transmitted data was
incomplete.
Incorrect cable configuration.
See your System Administrator.
Communications software is not
installed or configured properly.
Magnetic Stripe Reader
Table 11-7. Troubleshooting the Magnetic Stripe Reader
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
MSR cannot read card.
Mobile computer detached from
MSR during card swipe.
Re-attach mobile computer to MSR and reswipe the card.
Faulty magnetic stripe on card.
See your System Administrator.
MSR application is not installed or Ensure the MSR application is installed on the mobile
configured properly.
computer.
Ensure the MSR application is configured correctly.
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
11-13
Table 11-7. Troubleshooting the Magnetic Stripe Reader (Continued)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Mobile computer
Mobile computer was removed
Ensure MSR is receiving power. Ensure mobile computer is
battery is not charging. from MSR or MSR was unplugged attached correctly. Confirm main battery is charging under
from AC power too soon.
Start - Settings - System - Power. If a mobile computer
battery is fully depleted, it can take up to four hours to fully
recharge a battery (if the mobile computer is off and longer
if the mobile computer is operating).
Battery is faulty.
Verify that other batteries charge properly. If so, replace
the faulty battery.
The mobile computer is not fully
attached to the MSR.
Detach and re-attach the MSR to the mobile computer,
ensuring it is firmly connected.
During data
Mobile computer detached from
MSR during communications.
Reattach mobile computer to MSR and retransmit.
communications, no
data was transmitted,
or transmitted data was
incomplete.
Incorrect cable configuration.
See your System Administrator.
Communications software is not
installed or configured properly.
®
11-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
®
A-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
A-3
Using the Block Recognizer, you can write characters directly on the mobile computer screen with the
stylus. These characters are translated into typed text. Use Block Recognizer to enter text, for
example, to write a note or to fill in fields in a dialog box.
Figure A-2 provides examples of how to write characters in lowercase. The Block Recognizer input
panel is divided into two writing areas. Letters written in the left area (labeled abc) create lowercase
letters. Use the right area (labeled 123) for writing numbers, symbols, special characters, and
punctuation.
Figure A-1. Using Block Recognizer
®
A-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
The following chart illustrates some of the characters you can write (the dot on each character is the
starting point for writing).
Figure A-2. Character Chart
For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question
mark next to the writing area.
Demo Program
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 3
SelfTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
MSR 9000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
MSR Cameo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Scanning Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Ctl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
®
B-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
System Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Unique Unit ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Persist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Power Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Touch Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Printer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
Audio Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
Scanner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Symbol Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
B-3
If the demo program is not already running on the mobile computer, it can be launched from the Start
menu. The demo program files reside in the Application partition on the mobile computer. If this
partition was not loaded to the device, it can be obtained from the Symbol Web site and loaded using
The following options are available via the demo program.
•
Test Apps
• SelfTest - tests the functionality of various features on the mobile computer (e.g.,
display, scanner, touch panel, etc.).
• Notify - tests the green decode/function/shift/control/comm LEDs, and beeper
functionality.
• Keyboard - displays key codes when keys are pressed on the keypad.
• Display - shows examples of the shades (monochrome displays) and colors (color
displays) displayed in the touch panel.
• Memory - sample memory usage and allocation.
• MSR 9000 - sample magnetic stripe reader application.
• MSR Cameo - sample magnetic stripe reader application.
• Printing - sample printing application.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scan - sample scanning application for Visual C/C++.
Files - sample file management utility.
Sounds - plays and tests .wav files.
Images - sample image editor.
Ctl Panel- accesses the Control Panel window.
PC Link - sample PC/mobile computer connection notification dialog.
About OTL - provides version number, and other information, for the Demo program.
®
B-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
If the demo program is already on the mobile computer, tap Start - 9000 Demo. If the demo program
was downloaded into the Application directory on the mobile computer, navigate to the directory
using File Explorer and tap the Blt file. The Series 9000 Demo window appears.
Figure B-1. Series 9000 Demo Window
Tap the Test Apps icon. The Test Applications window appears.
Figure B-2. Series 9000 Demo Window - Test Applications
B-5
SelfTest
SelfTest tests the functionality of the features on the mobile computer.
1. To access the Self Test application, tap the Self Test icon on the Test Applications window.
The Self Test window appears.
Figure B-3. Self Test Window
2. Select as many check boxes to test as desired.
3. In the Run Tests box, select the One Time radio button to run one test for each checked item
or select the Continuously radio button to run tests for each checked item continuously.
4. Tap Settings.The Self-Test Settings window appears.
Figure B-4. Self Test Settings Window
5. Enter the desired settings and tap OK.
6. Tap Start to run the test(s).
7. Tap Exit to close the application.
®
B-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Notify
Notify tests the functionality of the green decode LED, function, shift and control key LEDs (keypad
dependent), communication LED (where applicable), and beeper of the mobile computer.
1. To access the Notify application, tap the Notify icon on the Test Applications window. The
Notify Example window appears.
Figure B-5. Notify Window
2. Select one of the items from the list.
3. Tap the On button. The selected item is activated.
4. Tap the Off button.
5. Tap Exit to close the application.
B-7
Keyboard
Keyboard displays the values of a key on the keypad.
1. To access the Keyboard application, tap the Keyboard icon on the Test Applications window.
The KeyCheck Example window appears.
Figure B-6. KeyCheck Example Window
2. Press a key on the mobile computer’s keypad.
3. The key’s codes display.
4. Tap X to close the application.
®
B-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Display
Display is a test of the shades and colors displayed in the touch panel when the mobile computer is
in use.
On mobile computers with a monochrome display, black, white and shades of gray appear. On mobile
computers with a color display, colors appear.
1. To access the Display test application, tap the Display icon on the Test Applications window.
The DisplayTest window appears.
Figure B-7. DisplayTest Window
2. Tap X to close the application.
B-9
Memory
Memory displays memory usage and allocation on the mobile computer.
1. To access the Memory application, tap the Memory icon on the Test Applications window.
The MemTest Example window appears.
Figure B-8. MemTest Example Window
2. Tap Alloc to allocate memory.
3. Tap Free to free previously allocated memory.
4. Tap Exit to close the application.
®
B-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
MSR 9000
The MSR 9000 application is designed to work with the snap-on MSR. This sample application
illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs.
with the appropriate power supply.
2. To access the MSR 9000 application, tap the MSR 9000 icon on the Test Applications
window. The MSR 9000 Swipe Card window appears.
Figure B-9. MSR 9000 Swipe Card Window
B-11
3. Swipe a magnetic stripe card. The content on the card displays in the window.
Figure B-10. MSR 9000 Data Window
4. Tap OK to swipe another card.
5. Tap X to close the application.
®
B-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
MSR Cameo
The MSR 9000 Cameo application is designed to work with the snap-on MSR. The application is
identical to the MSR 9000, however it uses a different driver to support a different type of MSR. This
sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs.
with the appropriate power supply.
2. To access the MSR Cameo application, tap the MSR Cameo icon on the Test Applications
window. The MSR Cameo Swipe Card window appears.
Figure B-11. MSR Cameo Swipe Card Window
B-13
3. Swipe a magnetic stripe card. The content on the card displays in the window.
Figure B-12. MSR Cameo Data Window
4. Tap OK to swipe another card.
5. Tap X to close the application.
Printing
Printing tests the functionality of a printer.
1. To access the Printing application, tap the Printing icon on the Test Applications window.
The BasicPrint v1.0 window appears.
Figure B-13. BasicPrint v1.0 Window
2. Select a printer from the Select a Printer: drop-down list.
3. Enter the text to print in the Text: box.
4. Enter the bar code to print in the Barcode: box.
5. Tap Print to print the information entered.
6. Tap X to close the application.
®
B-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Scan
The Visual C/C++ sample scanning application enables the mobile computer’s scanner, allows the
user to change scan parameters, and displays scanned data. To access the Scan demo, tap the Scan
icon on the Series 9000 Demo window. The ScanSamp2 Example window appears.
Figure B-14. ScanSamp2 Example Window
Scanning Data Fields
After a bar code is scanned, the following data appears in the screen:
•
•
•
Data displays the data encoded in the scanned bar code.
Type indicates the hex type scanned.
SRC indicates the scanner being used, and the bar code type scanned
(e.g., Code 128).
•
•
•
Time displays the time the bar code was scanned.
Len indicates the number of digits in the bar code.
Evt. indicates the status of the application, “Waiting for Trigger” or “Scanning.”
B-15
Scanning Options
The following options are available in the Scan window:
•
•
•
Scan provides an alternative to the trigger buttons on the mobile computer.
View displays the bar code content in a separate window.
Params is used to change scanning parameter options, such as:
• beep time (length of decode beep)
• beeper frequency (tone)
• LED-on time (length of time LED remains on upon decode)
• Code ID (AIM, Symbol)
• Wav File (sound of decode beep).
•
•
Codes selects the code types the mobile computer is able to decode, and sets the options
for each code type.
Cancel closes the Scan window.
Files
To access the Files demo, tap the Files icon on the Series 9000 Demo window for a file browser utility,
InkWiz Example. It provides similar Windows Explorer-like functionality and allows the user to
browse, cut, copy, paste and delete files as well as execute the program.
Figure B-15. InkWiz Example Window
®
B-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Sounds
To access the Sounds demo, tap the Sounds icon on the Series 9000 Demo window for a sample audio
application. The toolbar on the bottom of the window allows the user to open, play, record and save
sample .wav files.
Figure B-16. AudioSamp Example Window
Table B-1. Audio Sample Toolbar
Tap to Open a .wav file.
Tap to Play.
Tap to Stop.
Tap to Record.
Tap to Save a recorded .wav file.
B-17
Table B-1. Audio Sample Toolbar (Continued)
Tap to open About AudioSamp.
Tap to Exit Audio Sample.
®
B-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Images
To access the Image demo, tap the Images icon on the Series 9000 Demo window for a sample image
editor. The toolbar on the bottom of the window allows the user to open, edit and save sample image
files.
Figure B-17. ImageViewer Example Window
Table B-2. ImageViewer Toolbar
Tap an arrow and drag stylus on image to
accomplish the following:
•
•
•
•
Up Arrow expands image from
bottom to top or pans up (based upon
re-scale or pan mode).
Down Arrow expands image from top
to bottom or pans down (based upon
re-scale or pan mode).
Left Arrow shrinks image from right to
left or pans left (based upon re-scale
or pan mode).
Right Arrow expands image from left
to right or pans right (based upon re-
scale or pan mode).
B-19
Table B-2. ImageViewer Toolbar (Continued)
Tap an icon and use stylus to crop the
image as follows:
1. Fits image to screen (maintain original
aspect ratio).
1
2
3
2. Locates image to home position (upper
left).
3. Re-scales mode enable.
Tap to lock aspect ratio enable/disable.
Tap to Open a .jpg file.
Tap and drag stylus on image as follows:
1. Fine panning mode enable.
2. Coarse panning mode enable.
1
2
Tap to Save an image.
Tap to open About ImageViewer.
Tap to Exit ImageViewer.
®
B-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Ctl Panel
To access the Control Panel demo, tap the Ctl Panel icon on the Series 9000 Demo window to access
the Control Panel window, where you can specify settings for the mobile computer.
Figure B-18. CtlPanel Window
About
Tap About on the Control Panel to view the version of the Control Panel.
Figure B-19. About Window
B-21
System Versions
Tap System Versions to view version information for the applications on the mobile computer.
Figure B-20. System Versions Window
On the System Versions window:
•
•
•
•
•
Platform indicates the operating system running on the mobile computer (Pocket PC).
OS Version specifies the version of the operating system.
OEM Name is the OEM name of the mobile computer.
OEM Version indicates the build version of the operating system.
IPL Version identifies the build version of the system loader.
®
B-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Unique Unit ID
Tap Unique Unit ID on the Control Panel to view the mobile computer’s unique unit ID (a 16-byte hex
number identifier), and the version numbers for RCM (Resource Coordinator Manager) API, Rescoord
(Resource Coordinator) DLL, UUID DLL, and Temperature DLL.
Figure B-21. Unique Unit ID Window
Series 9000 mobile computers do not support the Temperature DLL.
Note
Persist
Persist allows changes made by the Control Panel to remain in effect after a cold boot. When
enabled, Persist creates .reg files which save specific settings that are made and restore the settings
to the registry after a cold boot.
®
B-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Power Settings
Select Power Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use for the mobile computer’s
devices.
Figure B-24. Power Settings Window
Tap each device listed to select the appropriate settings, where applicable. Scroll through the device
values to select the appropriate value.
B-25
Date and Time
Tap Date and Time on the Control Panel to change the date and time. The Date and Time window
appears.
Figure B-25. Date and Time Window
To change the time, tap the Time: field and up the up and down arrows to change the value.
To change the date, tap the down arrow in the Date: field. A calendar box appears. Select the month
and then select the day.
Figure B-26. Date Selection
®
B-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Touch Calibrate
Select Touch Calibrate to re-align the window. Press ESC to exit.
Figure B-27. Align Window
Printer Settings
Select Printer Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use for printing.
Figure B-28. Printer Settings Window
Tap each item listed to select the appropriate settings, where applicable. Scroll through the device
values to select the appropriate value.
B-27
Communication Settings
Select Comm Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use when communicating with
other devices.
Figure B-29. Communication Settings Window
Tap Port to select the appropriate communication settings to be used by ActiveSync. Scroll through
the communication settings to select the appropriate value.
Display Settings
Select Display Settings on the Control Panel to adjust display backlight features.
Figure B-30. Display Settings Window
®
B-28 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
•
•
Tap Intensity to toggle the backlight intensity between low, medium, high and super. As you
change the value, the display provides a sample of each intensity level.
Tap Backlight to turn the backlight on and off.
Audio Settings
Select Audio Settings on the Control Panel to specify the beeper volume and view the version
numbers for the Audio and Notify APIs.
Figure B-31. Audio Settings Window
•
Tap Beeper Volume to toggle the beeper volume between low (0), medium (1), high (2) and
very high (3). As you change the value, the beeper sounds to demonstrate the level.
•
•
API Version displays the version number of the Audio API.
Notify API Version displays the version number of the Notify API.
B-29
Scanner Settings
Select Scanner Settings on the Control Panel to specify scanner-related parameters.
Figure B-32. Scanner Settings Window
•
•
•
Selected Scanner displays the value of the selected scanner.
Tap Reader Params to view and modify the values of various reader parameters.
Tap Interface Params to view and modify the values of the following interface parameters:
• Interface Type
• Power Settle Time
• Enable Settle Time
• Low Power Time.
•
•
Tap Scan Params to view and modify the values of various scanner parameters.
Tap Device Info to see the values of the following parameters:
• Beam Width
• Aim Mode
• Scan Direction
• Feedback
• Supported Fmts
• Max Image Rect.
®
B-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
•
Tap Scanner Version to view the version numbers for the API, MDD, PDD, decoder and
hardware.
Refer to the Windows CE Help File for Symbol Terminals in the SMDK for eVC4 for details on the
available parameter options.
Symbol Security
Tap Symbol Security on the Control Panel to view the security values of the mobile computer’s
features.
Figure B-33. Symbol Security Window
PC Link
Select the PC Link icon to connect to a host computer with the appropriate power connections.
®
B-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
ImagerSample
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 3
Launching ImagerSample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Focus Near . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
®
C-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
C-3
Introduction
The ImagerSample application (in mobile computers with an integrated imager) provides the user
with the ability to capture and display image files. This chapter provides an overview of the
ImagerSample program for capturing images with the mobile computer.
Launching ImagerSample
ImagerSample can be launched from the Application folder on the mobile computer. Open the
Application folder and tap ImagerSample to launch the demo program. The ImagerSample window
appears.
Menus
Display Window
Trigger to View/
Trigger to Capture
Figure C-1. ImagerSample Window
Table C-1. ImagerSample Window Options
Option
Description
Menus
File
page C-4).
Capture: Allows the video image in the display window to be captured (see
Viewer: Turns on the video image in the display window to capture an image (see
®
C-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table C-1. ImagerSample Window Options (Continued)
Option
Description
Options
Help
Display Window
This area contains the video image, or a recently captured image.
Trigger to View/Trigger to
Capture
This message text shows the current mode in the display window:
• Trigger to View: Image in display window is in capture mode. Press any scan
button to start the Image Acquisition process by enabling image capture. A
real-time video image displays.
• Trigger to Capture: Image in display window is a real-time video image. Press
any scan button to acquire the image displayed.
Menus
Use the menus to set options and save, capture and view images.
File
Use the File menu to save, capture and view an image, or exit the ImagerSample application.
Save As
Save the currently loaded image file in bitmap file format.
C-5
To save an acquired image:
1. Tap ImagerSample - File - Save As. The Save Image file window appears.
Figure C-2. ImagerSample - Save As Window
2. Enter the name of the image to save in the Name text box.
3. Select the folder in which you want to save the image from the Folder drop-down list.
4. The default type of file to save is .bmp.
5. Select the location in which to save the file from the Location drop-down list.
6. Tap OK to save the image.
If no folder is selected, the default folder to save acquired images is ‘\My
Documents’.
Note
Capture
When the window displays a real-time video image, tap File - Capture to acquire the image displayed.
Viewer
When the window displays a a recently captured image, tap File - Viewer to display a real-time video
image.
®
C-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Exit
Tap File - Exit to exit the ImagerSample application.
Options
Use the Options menu to set the Aim, Lamp and Focus Near selections.
Aim
Tap Options - Aim (laser aim) to create a targeting pattern when aiming the exit window.
Figure C-3. Aiming Pattern
Lamp
Tap Options - Lamp to turn the lamp on during the exposure phase of image acquisition.
Focus Near
Tap Options - Focus Near to enable a close focal (focus) length.
Help
The Help menu provides software and hardware information and enables defaults to be reset.
®
C-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Specifications
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 3
Mobile Computer Pin-Outs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Accessory CAM and MSR Pin-Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
®
D-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
D-3
The following table summarizes the mobile computer’s intended operating environment.
Table D-1. Technical Specifications
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
-4° to 122° F (-20° to +50° C)
-40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)
5% to 95% non-condensing
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Drop to Concrete
+/-15 kVDC (air); +/- 8 kVDC (contact)
6 feet (1.8 meters) at 14° F to 122° F (-10°C to 50°C)
5 feet (1.52 meters) at 14° F to -4° F (-10°C to -20°C)
Sealing
IP64 (electronic enclosure)
Dimensions
9.2 in. L x 3.6 in. W x 7.6 in. H
(233.7 mm L x x 91.4 mm W x 193 mm H)
Weight (including battery)
Display
27 oz (765.5 g)
Transflective color TFT-LCD, 65K colors, 240 (W) x 320 (L) (QVGA size)
Monochrome TFT-LCD, 16 shades, 240 (W) x 320 (L) (QVGA size)
Touch Panel
Main Battery
Backup Battery
CPU
Polycarbonate, analog resistive touch
Rechargeable Lithium-Ion 2200 mAh minimum (7.4V)
Ni-MH battery (rechargeable), 20mAh (3.6V) 3 cells
Intel® XScale™ PXA255 processor at 400 mHz
®
®
Operating Platform
Memory
Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs
64MB RAM/ 64MB ROM
128MB RAM/ 64MB ROM
Interface
RS-232, max. 115.2 kbps min. 1200bps
Type II
MMC Card Slot
Keypad Options
53-key standard
Optional Keypads:
•
•
•
•
43-key
3270 Emulator
5250 Emulator
VT Emulator.
Scanning:
®
D-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table D-1. Technical Specifications (Continued)
1D Decode Capability
Code 39, code 128, code 93, codabar, code 11, discrete 2 of 5, EAN-3, EAN-13,
EAN-128, interleaved 2 of 5, TLC39 (telecommunications, UPCA, UPCE and UPC/
EAN supplements.
Imaging Decode Capability
Code 39, code 128, code 93, codabar, code 11, discrete 2 of 5, EAN-3, EAN-13,
EAN-128, interleaved 2 of 5, TLC39 (telecommunications, UPCA, UPCE, UPC/
EAN supplements composite code (retail), coupon code (retail), macro PDF-417,
(macro) micro PDF-417 (T&L), micro PDF-417 (telecommunications), MSI, PDF-
417 (automotive), RSS expanded, RSS limited and RSS-14Maxi Code (UPS),
Data matrix (electronics industry, US Postnet (USPS), US Planet (USPS), UK 4-
state, Australian 4-state, Canadian 4-state, Japanese 4-state, Dutch Kix
D-5
Mobile Computer Pin-Outs
17
1
9
8
Figure D-1. Pin Locations
Table D-2. MC9000-G Pin-Outs
PIN Number
Signal Name
USB_GND
Function
1
USB
2
USB_D_PLUS
TXD
USB
3
RS232C
4
RXD
RS232C
5
DCD
RS232C
6
RTS
RS232C
7
DSR
RS232C
8
GND
Ground, 2.5A max.
9
RI
RS232C
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CRADLE_DET
DTR
Grounded by cradle when in cradle
RS232C
Not connected
POWER_IN
CTS
Not connected
12V, 2.5A max
RS232C
USB_5V_DET
USB_D_MINUS
EXT_PWR_OUT
USB
USB
3.3V @500mA
®
D-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Accessory CAM and MSR Pin-Outs
Figure D-2. CAM and MSR Serial Connector
Table D-3. CAM and MSR Serial Connector Pin-outs
Pin
1
Signal
USB_5V_DET
2
USB_D_MINUS
3
USB_D_PLUS
4
GND
5
GND
6
PWR_EXT_OUT
7
CRADLE_DET*
8
DSR
DCD
TXD
CTS
DTR
RI
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RTS
RXD
®
E-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
E-3
Introduction
This appendix contains the keypad maps for the keypad configurations. Each key is listed in the table
with its value, depending on the state of the keypad.
Keypads
The mobile computer has five interchangeable modular keypads:
•
•
•
•
•
43-key
53-key
3270 Emulator
5250 Emulator
VT Emulator.
The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications.
E-5
Table E-1. 43-Key Keypad Functions
Local Function
Display Backlight On/Off
Key Sequence
Keypad Backlight On/Off
Contrast +
Contrast -
Volume +
Volume -
<Func><F1>
<Func><F5>
<Func><F4>
<Func><F8>
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
1
49
49
u
85
117
85
U
160+85
85
u
117
85
U
160+85
®
E-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
2
50
50
v
86
118
86
V
160+86
86
v
118
86
V
160+86
51
3
4
5
51
w
87
119
87
W
160+87
87
w
119
87
W
160+87
49
49
r
82
114
82
R
160+82
82
r
114
82
R
160+82
53
53
s
83
115
83
S
160+83
83
s
115
83
S
160+83
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-7
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
6
54
54
t
84
116
84
T
160+84
84
t
116
84
T
160+84
55
7
8
9
55
o
p
q
79
111
79
O
P
160+79
79
o
p
q
111
79
O
P
160+79
56
56
80
112
80
160+80
80
112
80
160+80
57
57
81
113
81
Q
160+81
81
113
81
Q
160+81
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
0
49
49
y
89
121
89
Y
160+89
89
y
121
89
Y
160+89
F1
a
65
97
97
A
160+65
*
*
B
C
F2
F3
b
c
66
98
66
98
66
B
C
160+66
66
b
c
160+66
67
99
67
99
67
160+67
67
160+67
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-9
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
F4
d
e
f
68
100
68
D
E
F
160+68
*
*
F5
69
101
69
160+69
*
*
F
F6
70
102
70
160+70
70
f
102
70
160+70
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
F6
g
h
i
71
103
71
G
H
I
160+71
71
g
h
+
-
103
71
G
H
+
-
160+71
F8
72
104
72
160+72
72
104
72
160+72
F9
73
105
73
160+73
107
43
160+107
43
F10
j
74
106
74
J
160+74
109
45
160+109
45
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-11
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
F11
k
75
107
75
K
L
160+75
106
*
42
*
?
160+106
42
F12
l
76
108
76
160+76
191
/
47
160+191
63
*
m
77
109
77
M
160+77
77
m
109
77
M
160+77
*
n
78
110
78
N
160+78
78
n
110
78
N
160+78
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
Space
BKSP
UP
32
32
Space
32
32
32
Space
160+32
8
8
8
8
8
BKSP
8
BKSP
160+8
8
BKSP
38
40
-
DOWN
-
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-13
Table E-2. 43-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Default
(Numlock)
State
Alpha Shift-Alpha
State State
Func
State
Shift-Func
State
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
Right
39
-
Left
37
-
.
190
46
x
z
88
120
88
X
Z
160+88
88
x
z
120
88
X
Z
160+88
106
*
42
90
122
90
160+90
90
122
90
160+90
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-15
Table E-3. 53-Key Keypad Functions
Local Function
Display Backlight On/Off
Key Sequence
<Func><Z>
<Func><X>
<Func><D>
<Func><I>
<Func><H>
<Func><M>
Keypad Backlight On/Off
Contrast +
Contrast -
Volume +
Volume -
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
1
2
3
49
49
!
160+49
112
33
-
F1
F2
F3
F1
1160+12
50
-
50
64
-
@
#
160+50
113
F2
160+113
51
-
51
35
-
160+51
114
F3
160+114
-
®
E-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
4
5
6
7
8
9
52
52
$
160+52
115
103
-
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F4
160+115
53
-
53
106
-
%
^
160+53
116
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
160+116
54
-
54
94
-
160+54
117
160+117
55
-
55
112
-
&
*
160+55
118
160+118
56
-
56
42
-
160+56
119
160+119
57
-
57
41
-
(
160+57
120
160+120
-
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-17
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
State
State State
0
48
48
)
160+48
121
40
-
F10
F10
160+121
38
-
UP
-
DOWN
Right
Left
40
39
37
13
-
-
-
ENTER
13
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
a
b
c
65
97
A
160+65
188
65
44
60
98
66
46
60
99
67
39
34
100
68
,
.
‘
<
>
“
160+188
66
B
C
D
66
190
160+190
67
160+67
222
160+222
68
b
160+68
*
*
{
e
69
101
69
E
160+69
219
[
91
160+219
123
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-19
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
f
70
102
F
160+70
221
70
]
\
93
}
|
160+221
71
125
103
71
g
h
G
H
160+71
220
92
160+220
72
124
104
72
160+72
*
*
i
73
105
73
I
160+73
*
*
~
j
74
106
74
J
160+74
192
‘
96
160+192
126
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
k
l
75
107
K
160+75
75
75
k
/
107
75
K
160+75
76
108
76
L
160+76
191
47
?
160+191
77
63
m
109
77
M
160+77
*
*
n
o
78
110
78
N
O
160+78
189
-
45
_
160+189
79
95
111
79
160+79
79
o
111
79
O
160+79
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-21
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
p
q
r
80
112
P
160+80
80
80
p
q
;
112
80
P
160+80
81
113
81
Q
R
S
T
160+81
81
113
81
Q
160+81
82
114
82
160+82
186
59
:
160+186
83
58
s
t
115
83
160+83
187
+
-
43
+
-
160+187
84
43
116
84
160+84
109
45
160+109
85
45
u
117
85
U
85
*
106
42
*
160+106
42
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-22 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
v
86
118
V
160+86
191
86
/
47
?
160+191
87
63
w
x
119
87
W
X
160+87
187
=
43
+
160+187
88
43
120
88
160+88
*
*
y
89
121
89
Y
160+89
89
y
121
89
Y
160+89
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
E-23
Table E-4. 53-Key Keypad Mapping (Continued)
Shift-Func
State
Default Shift
State State State
Func
VK Code
(Decimal)
ASCII Value
(Decimal)
Key
z
90
90
122
90
Z
*
*
* See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for special function key values.
®
E-24 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
3270 Emulator Configuration
The 3270 emulator configuration contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function
key. The 3270 emulator configuration uses the 53-key mapping whe)n not in the emulator mode (see
Table E-4 for descriptions for the 53-key mappings. The emulator mapping functions include:
•
•
•
3270 key functions
3270 emulator keys
3270 character map.
Figure E-3. 3270 Emulator Keypad
E-25
Table E-5. 3270 Key Functions
Local Function
Program Information
Diagnostics
Key Sequence
<Func><Ctrl><P>
<Func><Ctrl><D>
<Func><Ctrl><K>
<Func><Ctrl><Q>
<Func><Ctrl><C>
<Func><Ctrl><R>
<Func><Ctrl><M>
<Func><Ctrl><F>
<Func><Ctrl><T>
<Upper Left Button>
<Upper Right Button>
<Func><Shift>
<Func><Ctrl><Z>
<Ctrl><Left>
Keyclicks On/Off
Quiet Mode On/Off
Mobile Computer Configuration
Host Profiles
Message Recall
Free Cursor Mode
Close Session
Previous Session
Next Session
Caps Lock
View Mode On/Off
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
<Ctrl><Right>
<Ctrl><Up>
Scroll Up
Scroll Down
<Ctrl><Down>
<Func><Z>
Display Backlight On/Off
Keypad Backlight On/Off
Contrast +
<Func><X>
<Func><D>
Contrast -
<Func><I>
Volume +
<Func><H>
Volume -
<Func><M>
®
E-26 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-6. 3270 Emulator Keys
3270 Key
Key Sequence
Attention
<Ctrl><G>
<BKSP>
Backspace
Back Tab
Clear
<Ctrl><J>
<Esc>
Clear EOF
Delete
Dup
<Ctrl><K>
<Func><BKSP>
<Ctrl><D>
Enter
<Enter>
Erase Input
Field Mark
Home
<Ctrl><E>
<Ctrl><F>
<Func><*>
<Ctrl><H>
Insert
New Line
Reset
<Ctrl><N>
<Ctrl><O>
System Request
Tab
<Ctrl><L>
<Func><Space>
<Left Arrow>
<Right Arrow>
<Up Arrow>
<Down Arrow>
<Ctrl><A>
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
PA1
PA2
<Ctrl><B>
PA3
<Ctrl><C>
F1
<Func><1>
<Func><2>
<Func><3>
F2
F3
E-27
Table E-6. 3270 Emulator Keys (Continued)
3270 Key
Key Sequence
F4
<Func><4>
<Func><5>
<Func><6>
<Func><7>
<Func><8>
<Func><9>
<Func><0>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><8>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Ctrl><1>
<Ctrl><2>
<Ctrl><3>
<Ctrl><4>
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Table E-7. 3270 Character Map
Char
Space
Key Sequence
<space>
®
E-28 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-7. 3270 Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Ctrl><5>
!
"
<Shift><Func><C>
<Ctrl><6>
<Ctrl><7>
<Ctrl><8>
<Ctrl><9>
<Func><C>
<Ctrl><0>
<Func><Ctrl><A>
<*>
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
<Func><S>
<Func><A>
<Func><T>
<.>
-
.
/
<Func><V>
<0>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<Shift><Func><R>
<Func><R>
;
E-29
Table E-7. 3270 Character Map (Continued)
Char
<
Key Sequence
<Shift><Func><A>
=
<Func><W>
<Shift><Func><B>
<Func><Ctrl><G>
<Func><Ctrl><B>
<Shift><A>
<Shift><B>
<Shift><C>
<Shift><D>
<Shift><E>
<Shift><F>
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
<Shift><G>
<Shift><H>
<Shift><I>
J
<Shift><J>
<Shift><K>
<Shift><L>
K
L
M
N
O
P
<Shift><M>
<Shift><N>
<Shift><O>
<Shift><P>
<Shift><Q>
<Shift><R>
<Shift><S>
<Shift><T>
<Shift><U>
<Shift><V>
Q
R
S
T
U
V
®
E-30 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-7. 3270 Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Shift><W>
W
X
Y
Z
[
<Shift><X>
<Shift><Y>
<Shift><Z>
<Func><E>
<Func><G>
<Func><F>
<Func><Ctrl><E>
<Shift><Func><N>
<Func><J>
<A>
\
]
^
_
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
<B>
<C>
<D>
<E>
<F>
g
h
i
<G>
<H>
<I>
j
<J>
k
l
<K>
<L>
m
n
o
p
q
<M>
<N>
<O>
<P>
<Q>
E-31
Table E-7. 3270 Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
r
<R>
<S>
<T>
<U>
<V>
<W>
<X>
<Y>
<Z>
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
<Shift><Func><E>
<Shift><Func><G>
<Shift><Func><F>
<Shift><Func><J>
}
~
®
E-32 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
5250 Emulator Configuration
The 5250 emulator configuration contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function
key. The 5250 emulator configuration uses the 53-key mapping when not in the emulator mode (see
Table E-4 for descriptions for the 53-key mappings). The emulator mapping functions include:
•
•
•
5250 key functions
5250 emulator keys
5250 character map.
Figure E-4. 5250 Emulator Keypad
E-33
Table E-8. 5250 Key Functions
Local Function
Program Information
Diagnostics
Key Sequence
<Func><Ctrl><P>
<Func><Ctrl><D>
<Func><Ctrl><K>
<Func><Ctrl><Q>
<Func><Ctrl><C>
<Func><Ctrl><R>
<Func><Ctrl><M>
<Func><Ctrl><F>
<Func><Ctrl><T>
<Upper Left Button>
<Upper Right Button>
<Func><Shift>
<Func><Ctrl><Z>
<Ctrl><Left>
Keyclicks On/Off
Quiet Mode On/Off
Mobile Computer Configuration
Host Profiles
Message Recall
Free Cursor Mode
Close Session
Previous Session
Next Session
Caps Lock
View Mode On/Off
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Scroll Up
<Ctrl><Right>
<Ctrl><Up>
<Ctrl><Down>
<Func><Z>
Scroll Down
Display Backlight On/Off
Keypad Backlight On/Off
Contrast +
<Func><X>
<Func><D>
Contrast -
<Func><I>
Volume +
<Func><H>
Volume -
<Func><M>
®
E-34 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-9. 5250 Emulator Keys
5250 Key
Attention
Key Sequence
<Ctrl><G>
<BKSP>
Backspace
Back Tab
Clear
<Func><Space>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><1>
<Func><BKSP>
<Ctrl><D>
Delete
Dup
Enter
<Ent>
Erase Input
Field Exit
Field Minus
Help
<Ctrl><E>
<Field Exit>
<Func><*>
<Ctrl><C>
Home
<Ctrl><A>
Insert
<Ctrl><H>
Print
<Ctrl><B>
Reset
<Func><.>
Roll Up
Roll Down
System Request
Tab
<Ctrl><J>
<Ctrl><L>
<Ctrl><K>
<Ctrl><I>
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
F1
<Left Arrow>
<Right Arrow>
<Up Arrow>
<Down Arrow>
<Func><1>
<Func><2>
<Func><3>
F2
F3
E-35
Table E-9. 5250 Emulator Keys (Continued)
5250 Key
Key Sequence
<Func><4>
F4
F5
<Func><5>
<Func><6>
<Func><7>
<Func><8>
<Func><9>
<Func><0>
<Shift><1>
<Shift><2>
<Shift><3>
<Shift><4>
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><7>
<Shift><8>
<Shift><9>
<Shift><0>
<Ctrl><1>
<Ctrl><2>
<Ctrl><3>
<Ctrl><4>
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Table E-10. 5250 Character Map
Char
Key Sequence
<space>
Space
®
E-36 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-10. 5250 Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Ctrl><5>
!
"
<Shift><Func><C>
<Ctrl><6>
<Ctrl><7>
<Ctrl><8>
<Ctrl><9>
<Func><C>
<Ctrl><0>
<Func><Ctrl><A>
<*>
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
<Func><S>
<Func><A>
<Func><T>
<.>
-
.
/
<Func><V>
<0>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<Shift><Func><R>
<Func><R>
;
E-37
Table E-10. 5250 Character Map (Continued)
Char
<
Key Sequence
<Shift><Func><A>
=
<Func><W>
<Shift><Func><B>
<Func><Ctrl><G>
<Func><Ctrl><B>
<Shift><A>
<Shift><B>
<Shift><C>
<Shift><D>
<Shift><E>
<Shift><F>
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
<Shift><G>
<Shift><H>
<Shift><I>
J
<Shift><J>
<Shift><K>
<Shift><L>
K
L
M
N
O
P
<Shift><M>
<Shift><N>
<Shift><O>
<Shift><P>
<Shift><Q>
<Shift><R>
<Shift><S>
<Shift><T>
<Shift><U>
<Shift><V>
Q
R
S
T
U
V
®
E-38 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-10. 5250 Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Shift><W>
W
X
Y
Z
[
<Shift><X>
<Shift><Y>
<Shift><Z>
<Func><E>
<Func><G>
<Func><F>
<Func><Ctrl><E>
<Shift><Func><N>
<Func><J>
<A>
\
]
^
_
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
<B>
<C>
<D>
<E>
<F>
g
h
i
<G>
<H>
<I>
j
<J>
k
l
<K>
<L>
m
n
o
p
q
<M>
<N>
<O>
<P>
<Q>
E-39
Table E-10. 5250 Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
r
<R>
<S>
<T>
<U>
<V>
<W>
<X>
<Y>
<Z>
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
<Shift><Func><E>
<Shift><Func><G>
<Shift><Func><F>
<Shift><Func><J>
}
~
®
E-40 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
VT Emulator Configuration
The VT emulator configuration contains a Power button, application keys, scroll keys and a function
key. The VT emulator configuration uses the 53-key mapping when not in the emulator mode (see
Table E-4 for descriptions for the 53-key mappings). The emulator mapping functions include:
•
•
•
•
VT key functions
VT-100 emulator keys
VT-220 emulator keys
VT/HP character map.
Figure E-5. VT Emulator Keypad
E-41
Table E-11. VT Key Functions
VT Function
Key Sequence
Program Information
Diagnostics
<Func><Ctrl><P>
<Func><Ctrl><D>
<Func><Ctrl><K>
<Func><Ctrl><Q>
<Func><Ctrl><C>
<Func><Ctrl><R>
<Func><Ctrl><T>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><1>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><3>
<Func><Shift>
<Func><Ctrl><Z>
<Ctrl><Left>
Keyclicks On/Off
Quiet Mode
Mobile Computer Configuration
Host Profiles
Close Session
Previous Session
Next Session
Caps Lock
View Mode On/Off
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Scroll Up
<Ctrl><Right>
<Ctrl><Up>
<Ctrl><Down>
<Func><Z>
Scroll Down
Display Backlight On/Off
Keypad Backlight On/Off
Contrast +
<Func><X>
<Func><D>
Contrast -
<Func><I>
Volume +
<Func><H>
Volume -
<Func><M>
®
E-42 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-12. VT-100 Emulator Keys
VT-100 Key
Key Sequence
Return
Backspace
Tab
<Return>
<BKSP>
<Func><*>
<Up Arrow>
<Left Arrow>
<Esc>
Up Arrow
Left Arrow
ESC
BS
<BKSP>
LF
<Ctrl><J>
Hard Mobile Computer Reset
<Func><Ctrl><H>
<Return>
Enter
Backspace(Delete)
<BKSP>
Backtab
Down Arrow
Right Arrow
PF1
<Func><.>
<Down Arrow>
<Right Arrow>
<Func><1>
<Func><2>
<Func><3>
<Func><4>
PF2
PF3
PF4
Table E-13. VT-220 Emulator Keys
VT-220 Key
Key Sequence
Return
Backspace
Tab
<Return>
<BKSP>
<Func><*>
E-43
Table E-13. VT-220 Emulator Keys (Continued)
VT-220 Key
Key Sequence
Up Arrow
<Up Arrow>
Left Arrow
<Left Arrow>
<Func><Ctrl><H>
<Func><Ctrl><Left>
<Func><Space>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><4>
<Func><1>
Hard Mobile Computer Reset
Find
Insert Here
Prev Screen
PF1
PF2
<Func><2>
PF3
<Func><3>
PF4
<Func><4>
BREAK1
F6
<Func><5>
<Func><6>
F7
<Func><7>
F8
<Func><8>
F9
<Func><9>
F10
<Func><0>
F11
<Shift><1>
F12
<Shift><2>
F13
<Shift><3>
F14
<Shift><4>
F15/Help
F16/Do
F17
<Shift><5>
<Shift><6>
<Shift><7>
F18
<Shift><8>
F19
<Shift><9>
F20
<Shift><0>
Enter
<Return>
®
E-44 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-13. VT-220 Emulator Keys (Continued)
VT-220 Key
Backspace(Delete)
Key Sequence
<Ctrl><BKSP>
Backtab
<Func><.>
Down Arrow
Right Arrow
Soft Mobile Computer Reset
Select
<Down Arrow>
<Right Arrow>
<Func><Ctrl><S>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><5>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><7>
<Func><Ctrl><Shift><6>
Remove
Next Screen
Table E-14. VT/HP Character Map
Char
Key Sequence
^@
^A
^B
^C
^D
^E
^F
<Ctrl><A>
<Ctrl><B>
<Ctrl><C>
<Ctrl><D>
<Ctrl><E>
<Ctrl><F>
<Ctrl><G>
<Ctrl><H>
<Ctrl><I>
<Ctrl><J>
<Ctrl><K>
<Ctrl><L>
<Ctrl><M>
^G
^H
^I
^J
^K
^L
^M
E-45
Table E-14. VT/HP Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
^N
^O
^P
^Q
^R
^S
^T
^U
^V
^W
^X
^Y
^Z
ESC
^\
<Ctrl><N>
<Ctrl><O>
<Ctrl><P>
<Ctrl><Q>
<Ctrl><R>
<Ctrl><S>
<Ctrl><T>
<Ctrl><U>
<Ctrl><V>
<Ctrl><W>
<Ctrl><X>
<Ctrl><Y>
<Ctrl><Z>
<ESC>
<Ctrl><1>
<Ctrl><2>
<Ctrl><3>
<Ctrl><4>
<space>
^]
^^
^_
Space
!
<Func><Q>
<Shift><Func><C>
<Ctrl><6>
<Ctrl><7>
<Ctrl><8>
<Ctrl><9>
<Func><C>
<Ctrl><0>
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
®
E-46 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-14. VT/HP Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Func><Ctrl><A>
)
*
+
,
<*>
<Func><S>
<Func><A>
<Func><T>
<.>
-
.
/
<Func><V>
<0>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<8>
<9>
<Func><P>
<Func><R>
<Func><K>
<Func><W>
<Func><L>
<Func><Ctrl><G>
<Func><Ctrl><B>
<Shift><A>
<Shift><B>
<Shift><C>
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
E-47
Table E-14. VT/HP Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Shift><D>
D
E
F
<Shift><E>
<Shift><F>
<Shift><G>
<Shift><H>
<Shift><I>
<Shift><J>
<Shift><K>
<Shift><L>
<Shift><M>
<Shift><N>
<Shift><O>
<Shift><P>
<Shift><Q>
<Shift><R>
<Shift><S>
<Shift><T>
<Shift><U>
<Shift><V>
<Shift><W>
<Shift><X>
<Shift><Y>
<Shift><Z>
<Func><E>
<Func><G>
<Func><F>
<Func><Ctrl><E>
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
®
E-48 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Table E-14. VT/HP Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
<Shift><Func><N>
_
`
<Func><J>
<A>
<B>
<C>
<D>
<E>
a
b
c
d
e
f
<F>
g
h
I
<G>
<H>
<I>
j
<J>
k
l
<K>
<L>
m
n
o
p
q
r
<M>
<N>
<O>
<P>
<Q>
<R>
<S>
<T>
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
<U>
<V>
<W>
<X>
<Y>
E-49
Table E-14. VT/HP Character Map (Continued)
Char
Key Sequence
z
{
|
<Z>
<Shift><Func><E>
<Func><O>
}
~
<Shift><Func><F>
<Shift><Func><J>
®
E-50 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
®
GL-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Access Point
Access Point (AP) refers to Symbol’s Spectrum24 Ethernet
Access Point. It is a piece of communications equipment
that manages communications between the host computer
system and one or more wireless terminals. An AP connects
to a wired Ethernet LAN and acts as a bridge between the
Ethernet wired network and IEEE 802.11 interoperable
radio-equipped mobile units, such as a mobile computer.
The AP allows a mobile user to roam freely through a
facility while maintaining a seamless connection to the
wired network.
®
®
AirBEAM Manager
AirBEAM Manager is a comprehensive wireless network
management system that provides essential functions that
are required to configure, monitor, upgrade and
®
troubleshoot the Spectrum24 wireless network and its
components (including networked mobile computers).
Some features include event notification, access point
configuration, diagnostics, statistical reports, auto-
discovery, wireless proxy agents and monitoring of access
points and mobile units.
®
AirBEAM Smart Client
AirBEAM® Smart Client is part of Symbol’s AirBEAM®
suite, which also includes AirBEAM® Safe and AirBEAM®
Manager. The AirBEAM® Smart Client system uses the
network accessible host server to store software files that
are to be downloaded to the mobile computers. The
AirBEAM® Smart Client provides the mobile computers
with the "smarts" to request software from the host. It
allows them to request, download and install software, as
well as to upload files and status data. The AirBEAM®
Smart Client uses the industry standard FTP or TFTP file
transfer protocols to check the host system for updates, and
if necessary, to transfer updated software. Most often,
AirBEAM® Smart Client is used with wireless networks,
but any TCP/IP connection can be used. For more
information, refer to the AirBEAM® Smart Windows® CE
Client Product Reference Guide (p/n 72-63060-xx).
AP
See Access Point.
API
An interface by means of which one software component
communicates with or controls another. Usually used to
refer to services provided by one software component to
another, usually via software interrupts or function calls
Glossary GL-3
Aperture
The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle
that establishes the field of view.
Application Programming Interface
ANSI Terminal
See API.
A display terminal that follows commands in the ANSI
standard terminal language. For example, it uses escape
sequences to control the cursor, clear the screen and set
colors. Communications programs support the ANSI
terminal mode and often default to this terminal emulation
for dial-up connections to online services.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7
bit-plus-parity code representing 128 letters, numerals,
punctuation marks and control characters. It is a standard
data transmission code in the U.S.
Autodiscrimination
The ability of an interface controller to determine the code
type of a scanned bar code. After this determination is
made, the information content is decoded.
Bar
The dark element in a printed bar code symbol.
Bar Code
A pattern of variable-width bars and spaces which
represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine-
readable form. The general format of a bar code symbol
consists of a leading margin, start character, data or
message character, check character (if any), stop character,
and trailing margin. Within this framework, each
recognizable symbology uses its own unique format. See
Symbology.
Bar Code Density
Bar Height
The number of characters represented per unit of
measurement (e.g., characters per inch).
The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar
width.
Bar Width
Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the
symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar.
Baud Rate
A measure of the data flow or number of signaling events
occurring per second. When one bit is the standard "event,"
this is a measure of bits per second (bps). For example, a
baud rate of 50 means transmission of 50 bits of data per
second.
®
GL-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
BIOS
Bit
Basic Input Output System. A collection of ROM-based
code with a standard API used to interface with standard
PC hardware.
Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information.
Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data.
The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its
meaning.
Bits per Second (bps)
Bit
Bits transmitted or received.
Binary digit. One bit is the basic unit of binary information.
Generally, eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data.
The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its
meaning.
bps
See Bits Per Second.
Byte
On an addressable boundary, eight adjacent binary digits (0
and 1) combined in a pattern to represent a specific
character or numeric value. Bits are numbered from the
right, 0 through 7, with bit 0 the low-order bit. One byte in
memory is used to store one ASCII character.
BOOTP
A protocol for remote booting of diskless devices. Assigns
an IP address to a machine and may specify a boot file. The
client sends a bootp request as a broadcast to the bootp
server port (67) and the bootp server responds using the
bootp client port (68). The bootp server must have a table of
all devices, associated MAC addresses and IP addresses.
boot or boot-up
The process a computer goes through when it starts. During
boot-up, the computer can run self-diagnostic tests and
configure hardware and software.
CDMA
CDRH
Code Division Multiple Access is a cellular technology
originally know as IS-95.
Center for Devices and Radiological Health. A federal
agency responsible for regulating laser product safety. This
agency specifies various laser operation classes based on
power output during operation.
CDRH Class 1
This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification. This
class is considered intrinsically safe, even if all laser output
were directed into the eye's pupil. There are no special
operating procedures for this class.
Glossary GL-5
CDRH Class 2
No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform
to this limit. Laser operation in this class poses no danger
for unintentional direct human exposure.
Cellular Digital Packet Data
Character
See CDPD.
A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly
represents data or indicates a control function, such as a
number, letter, punctuation mark, or communications
control contained in a message.
Character Set
Check Digit
Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar
code symbology.
A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode. The scanner
inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and
checks that the resulting number matches the encoded
check digit. Check digits are required for UPC but are
optional for other symbologies. Using check digits
decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol
is decoded.
Codabar
A discrete self-checking code with a character set
consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters: ( -
$ : / , +).
Code 128
A high density symbology which allows the controller to
encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra
symbol elements.
Code 3 of 9 (Code 39)
A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code
symbology with a set of 43 character types, including all
uppercase letters, numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special
characters (- . / + % $ and space). The code name is derived
from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character
are wide, while the remaining 6 are narrow.
Code 93
An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but
offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding
density than Code 39.
Code Length
Cold Boot
COM port
Number of data characters in a bar code between the start
and stop characters, not including those characters.
A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all
user stored records and entries.
Communication port; ports are identified by number, e.g.,
COM1, COM2.
®
GL-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Continuous Code
A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol
are parts of characters. There are no intercharacter gaps in
a continuous code. The absence of gaps allows for greater
information density.
Cradle
A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for
communicating with a host computer, and provides a
storage place for the terminal when not in use.
Data Communications Equipment (DCE)
A device (such as a modem) which is designed to attach
directly to a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) device.
DCE
See Data Communications Equipment.
DCP
See Device COnfiguration Package.
Dead Zone
An area within a scanner's field of view, in which specular
reflection may prevent a successful decode.
Decode
To recognize a bar code symbology (e.g., UPC/EAN) and
then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned.
Decode Algorithm
A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data
representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a
bar code symbol.
Decryption
Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received
encrypted data. Also see, Encryption and Key.
Depth of Field
The range between minimum and maximum distances at
which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum
element width.
Device Configuration Package
The Symbol Device Configuration Pacage provides the
Product Reference Guide (PRG), flash partitions, Terminal
Configuration Manager (TCM) and the associated TCM
scripts. With this package hex images that represent flash
partitions can be created and downloaded to the mobile
computer.
DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Software that
automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations
logging onto a TCP/IP network. Similar to BOOTP, but also
permits the leasing of an IP address. It eliminates having to
manually assign permanent IP addresses. DHCP software
typically runs in servers and is also found in network
devices such as routers that allow multiple users access to
the Internet.
Glossary GL-7
DHCP Server
Discrete Code
Discrete 2 of 5
A server in the network or a service within a server that
assigns IP addresses.
A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between
characters (intercharacter gaps) are not part of the code.
A binary bar code symbology representing each character
by a group of five bars, two of which are wide. The location
of wide bars in the group determines which character is
encoded; spaces are insignificant. Only numeric characters
(0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
DNS Server
The Control Panel allows you to set the IP address for a
DNS Server, if used. This allows users to use server names,
rather than IP addresses. It is set on the Network tab of the
Control Panel.
Domain Name
DOS
The Control Panel allows you to set a Domain Name for the
DNS Server, if used (e.g., symbol.com). It is set on the
Network tab of the Control Panel.
Disk Operating System. This is basic software that allows
you to load and use software applications on your
computer. Also see NetID.
DRAM
DTE
Dynamic random access memory.
See Data Terminal Equipment.
EAN
European Article Number. This European/International
version of the UPC provides its own coding format and
symbology standards. Element dimensions are specified
metrically. EAN is used primarily in retail.
Element
Generic term for a bar or space.
Encoded Area
Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code
pattern, including start/stop characters and data.
ENQ (RS-232)
Encryption
ENQ software handshaking is also supported for the data
sent to the host.
Encryption is the scrambling and coding of data, typically
using mathematical formulas called algorithms, before
information is transmitted over any communications link or
network. A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to
encrypt or decrypt the data. Also see, Decryption and Key.
ESD
Electro-Static Discharge
®
GL-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
ESS_ID
Extended Service Set Identifier, defines the coverage area.
Prior to the release of the 802.11 specification the ESS_ID
was called the Net_ID or Network Identifier. For terminals
using Spectrum24 radios with the 802.11 protocol, an
ESS_ID allows facilities to limit which Access Points a
mobile computer can communicate with. It is set on the
Network tab of the Control Panel. The terminal can only
communicate with Spectrum24 Access Points that have
matching ESS_IDs.
Ethernet
Ethernet communication port. Allows a wired interface to a
radio network.
Flash Disk
Flash Memory
An additional megabyte of non-volatile memory for storing
application and configuration files.
Flash memory is nonvolatile, semi-permanent storage that
can be electronically erased in the circuit and
reprogrammed. Series 9000 mobile computers use Flash
memory to store the operating system (ROM-DOS), the
terminal emulators, and the Citrix ICA Client for DOS.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Frequency Hopping
A TCP/IP application protocol governing file transfer via
network or telephone lines. See TCP/IP.
The use of a random sequence of frequency channels to
achieve spread spectrum compliance. Stations that use
frequency hopping change their communications frequency
at regular intervals. A hopping sequence determines the
pattern at which frequencies are changed. Messages take
place within a hop. See Hopping Sequence and Spread
Spectrum.
FTP
See File Transfer Protocol.
Flash Memory
Flash memory is responsible for storing the system
firmware and is non-volatile. If the system power is
interrupted the data is not lost.
Gateway Address
An IP address for a network gateway or router. A mobile
computer may be part of a subnet as specified by its IP
address and Netmask. It can send packets directly to any
node on the same subnet. If the destination node is on a
different subnet, then the terminal sends the packet to the
gateway first. The gateway determines how to route the
packet to the destination subnet. This field is an option
used by networks that require gateways.
Glossary GL-9
Hard Reset
See Cold Boot.
Hopping Sequence
A set of random frequencies designed to minimize
interference with other sets of random frequencies. A
hopping sequence determines the pattern with which a
station that uses frequency hopping changes its
communications frequency. See Frequency Hopping.
Hz
Hertz; A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
Host Computer
A computer that serves other terminals in a network,
providing such services as computation, database access,
supervisory programs and network control.
IDE
IEC
Intelligent drive electronics. Refers to the solid-state hard
drive type.
International Electrotechnical Commission. This
international agency regulates laser safety by specifying
various laser operation classes based on power output
during operation.
IEC (825) Class 1
This is the lowest power IEC laser classification.
Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120
seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window
and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner's
oscillating mirror fails.
IEEE Address
See MAC Address.
Interleaved 2 of 5
A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs
in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces.
Interleaving provides for greater information density. The
location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each
group determines which characters are encoded. This
continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only
numeric (0 to 9) and START/STOP characters may be
encoded.
IOCTL
Input/Output Control.
Internet Protocol.
IP
imaging scanning
Mobile computers with an integrated imager use digital
camera technology to take a digital picture of a bar code,
store the resulting image in memory and execute state-of-
the-art software decoding algorithms to extract the data
from the image.
®
GL-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Intercharacter Gap
The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a
discrete code.
Interleaved Bar Code
A bar code in which characters are paired together, using
bars to represent the first character and the intervening
spaces to represent the second.
Interleaved 2 of 5
A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs
in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces.
Interleaving provides for greater information density. The
location of wide elements (bar/spaces) within each group
determines which characters are encoded. This continuous
code type uses no intercharacter spaces. Only numeric (0 to
9) and START/STOP characters may be encoded.
Internet Protocol Address
I/O Ports
See IP.
interface The connection between two devices, defined by
common physical characteristics, signal characteristics,
and signal meanings. Types of interfaces include RS-232
and PCMCIA.
Input/Output Ports
IP
I/O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information
into or out of the terminal’s memory. Series 9000 mobile
computers include Serial and USB ports.
(Internet Protocol) The IP part of the TCP/IP communications
protocol. IP implements the network layer (layer 3) of the
protocol, which contains a network address and is used to
route a message to a different network or subnetwork. IP
accepts “packets” from the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP
or UDP), adds its own header to it and delivers a
“datagram” to the layer 2 data link protocol. It may also
break the packet into fragments to support the maximum
transmission unit (MTU) of the network.
IP Address
(Internet Protocol address) The address of a computer
attached to an IP network. Every client and server station
must have a unique IP address. A 32-bit address used by a
computer on a IP network. Client workstations have either
a permanent address or one that is dynamically assigned to
them each session. IP addresses are written as four sets of
numbers separated by periods; for example, 204.171.64.2.
IPX/SPX
Internet Package Exchange/Sequential Packet Exchange. A
communications protocol for Novell. IPX is Novell’s Layer 3
protocol, similar to XNS and IP, and used in NetWare
networks. SPX is Novell's version of the Xerox SPP protocol.
Glossary GL-11
Kerberos
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol. It is
designed to provide strong authentication for client/server
applications by using secret-key cryptography. A free
implementation of this protocol is available from the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Kerberos is
available in many commercial products as well.
Key
A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt
or decrypt the data. Also see, Encryption and Decrypting.
LAN
Local area network. A radio network that supports data
communication within a local area, such as within a
warehouse of building.
laser scanner
LASER
A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light.
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of
Radiation.The laser is an intense light source. Light from a
laser is all the same frequency, unlike the output of an
incandescent bulb. Laser light is typically coherent and has
a high energy density.
Laser Diode
A gallium-arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected
to a power source to generate a laser beam. This laser type
is a compact source of coherent light.
LCD
See Liquid Crystal Display.
LED Indicator
A semiconductor diode (LED - Light Emitting Diode) used as
an indicator, often in digital displays. The semiconductor
uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency
determined by the semiconductor's particular chemical
composition.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
A display that uses liquid crystal sealed between two glass
plates. The crystals are excited by precise electrical
charges, causing them to reflect light outside according to
their bias. They use little electricity and react relatively
quickly. They require external light to reflect their
information to the user.
Light Emitting Diode
See LED.
®
MAC Address (also called IEEE Address)
Spectrum24 devices, like other Ethernet devices, have
unique, hardware-encoded MAC (also called IEEE
addresses). MAC addresses determine the device sending
or receiving data. The MAC address is a 48-bit number
written as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons.
®
GL-12 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
MC
Mobile Computer.
MIL
1 mil = 1 thousandth of an inch.
Misread (Misdecode)
A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader
or interface controller does not agree with the data
encoded within a bar code symbol.
Mobile Computer
In this text, mobile computer refers to the Symbol Series
9000 wireless portable computer. It can be set up to run
as a stand-alone device, or it can be set up to communicate
with a network, using wireless radio technology.
NCU
Network Control Unit.
NetBeui
A non-routable LAN protocol that is an extension to
NetBIOS. Used for IBM’s OS/2-based LAN Manager and
Microsoft’s LAN Manager and Windows for Workgroups.
NetID
For terminals using Spectrum24 radios with the Spring
protocol, a NetID allows facilities to limit which Access
Points a mobile computer can communicate with. It is set
on the Network tab of the Control Panel. The terminal can
only communicate with Spectrum24 Access Points that
have matching NetIDs. Also see ESS_ID.
Nominal
The exact (or ideal) intended value for a specified
parameter. Tolerances are specified as positive and
negative deviations from this value.
Nominal Size
Null Modem Cable
Standard size for a bar code symbol. Most UPC/EAN codes
are used over a range of magnifications (e.g., from 0.80 to
2.00 of nominal).
An RS-232 cable used to connect two personal computers
together in close proximity for file transfer. It attaches to
the serial ports of both machines and simulates what would
occur naturally if modems and the phone system were
used. It crosses the sending wire with the receiving wire.
NVM
ODI
Non-Volatile Memory.
See Open Data-Link Interface.
Glossary GL-13
Open Data-Link Interface (ODI)
Novell’s driver specification for an interface between
network hardware and higher-level protocols. It supports
multiple protocols on a single NIC (Network Interface
Controller). It is capable of understanding and translating
any network information or request sent by any other ODI-
compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can
understand and process.
Open System Authentication
PAN
Open System authentication is a null authentication
algorithm.
Personal area network. Using Bluetooth wireless
technology, PANs enable devices to communicate
wirelessly. Generally, a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic
group of less than 255 devices that communicate within
about a 33-foot range. Only devices within this limited area
typically participate in the network.
Parameter
PC Card
A variable that can have different values assigned to it.
A plug-in expansion card for laptop computers and other
devices, also called a PCMCIA card. PC Cards are 85.6mm
long x 54 mm wide, and have a 68 pin connector. There are
several different kinds:
Type I; 3.3 mm high; use - RAM or Flash RAM
Type II; 5 mm high; use - modems, LAN adaptors
Type III; 10.5 high; use - Hard Disks
PCMCIA
Personal Computer Memory Card Interface Association.
See PC Card.
PDT
Portable Data Terminal.
Percent Decode
The average probability that a single scan of a bar code
would result in a successful decode. In a well-designed bar
code scanning system, that probability should approach
near 100%.
PING
(Packet Internet Groper) An Internet utility used to
determine whether a particular IP address is online. It is
used to test and debug a network by sending out a packet
and waiting for a response.
Print Contrast Signal (PCS)
Measurement of the contrast (brightness difference)
between the bars and spaces of a symbol. A minimum PCS
value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable. PCS
= (RL - RD) / RL, where RL is the reflectance factor of the
background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars.
®
GL-14 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Programming Mode
Quiet Zone
The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter
values. See Scanning Mode.
A clear space, containing no dark marks, which precedes
the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the
stop character.
QWERTY
A standard keyboard commonly used on North American
and some European PC keyboards. “QWERTY” refers to the
arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of
keys.
RAM
Random Access Memory. Data in RAM can be accessed in
random order, and quickly written and read.
Reflectance
Resolution
Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface.
The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished
by a particular reading device or printed with a particular
device or method.
RF
Radio Frequency.
ROM
Read-Only Memory. Data stored in ROM cannot be changed
or removed.
ROM-DOS
Router
The name of the licensed Disk Operating System loaded
into the terminal’s flash file system.
A device that connects networks and supports the required
protocols for packet filtering. Routers are typically used to
extend the range of cabling and to organize the topology of
a network into subnets. See Subnet.
RS-232
An Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard that
defines the connector, connector pins, and signals used to
transfer data serially from one device to another.
Scan Area
Scanner
Area intended to contain a symbol.
An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and
produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and
spaces of the symbol. Its three main components are:
1. Light source (laser or photoelectric cell) - illuminates a
bar code.
2. Photodetector - registers the difference in reflected light
(more light reflected from spaces).
3. Signal conditioning circuit - transforms optical detector
output into a digitized bar pattern.
Glossary GL-15
Scanning Mode
The scanner is energized, programmed and ready to read a
bar code.
Scanning Sequence
A method of programming or configuring parameters for a
bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus.
SDK
Software Development Kit
Self-Checking Code
A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect
encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol.
Shared Key
Shared Key authentication is an algorithm where both the
AP and the MU share an authentication key.
SHIP
Symbol Host Interface Program.
Symbol Mobility Developer Kit.
See Warm Boot.
SMDK
Soft Reset
Space
The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background
between bars.
Spectrum24
Symbol’s frequency-hopping, spread spectrum cellular
network.
Spectrum One
Symbol’s implementation of the Spread Spectrum wireless
network, utilizing direct sequencing.
Specular Reflection
Spread Spectrum
The mirror-like direct reflection of light from a surface,
which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code.
A technique for uniformly distributing the information
content of a radio signal over a frequency range larger than
normally required for robust transmission of data.
Spreading the signal without adding additional information
adds significant redundancy, which allows the data to be
recovered in the presence of strong interfering signals such
as noise and jamming signals. The primary advantage of
spread spectrum technology is its ability to provide robust
communications in the presence of interfering signals.
Spring Radio Protocol
Start/Stop Character
A radio protocol that may be used by the Symbol
Spectrum24 radio card. Symbol Radio cards that use the
Spring protocol also have an Net ID.
A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with
start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction.
The start and stop characters are normally to the left and
right margins of a horizontal code.
®
GL-16 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
STEP
Symbol Terminal Enabler Program.
Subnet
A subset of nodes on a network that are serviced by the
same router. See Router.
Subnet Mask
A 32-bit number used to separate the network and host
sections of an IP address. A custom subnet mask subdivides
an IP network into smaller subsections. The mask is a
binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn
part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets.
Default is often 255.255.255.0.
Substrate
A foundation material on which a substance or image is
placed.
SVTP
Symbol Virtual Terminal Program.
Symbol
A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions
of a certain symbology, usually including start/stop
characters, quiet zones, data characters and check
characters.
Symbol Aspect Ratio
Symbol Height
The ratio of symbol height to symbol width.
The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones
of the first row and the last row.
Symbol Length
Symbology
Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet
zone (margin) adjacent to the start character to the end of
the quiet zone (margin) adjacent to a stop character.
The structural rules and conventions for representing data
within a particular bar code type (e.g. UPC/EAN, Code 39,
PDF417, etc.).
Glossary GL-17
TCP/IP
(Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) A
communications protocol used to internetwork dissimilar
systems. This standard is the protocol of the Internet and
has become the global standard for communications. TCP
provides transport functions, which ensures that the total
amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end.
UDP is an alternate transport that does not guarantee
delivery. It is widely used for real-time voice and video
transmissions where erroneous packets are not
retransmitted. IP provides the routing mechanism. TCP/IP is
a routable protocol, which means that all messages contain
not only the address of the destination station, but the
address of a destination network. This allows TCP/IP
messages to be sent to multiple networks within an
organization or around the world, hence its use in the
worldwide Internet. Every client and server in a TCP/IP
network requires an IP address, which is either
permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at startup.
Telnet
A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on the
Internet and TCP/IP-based networks. It allows a user at a
terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a
program.
Terminal
See Mobile Computer.
Terminate and Stay Resident (TSR)
A program under DOS that ends its foreground execution to
remain resident in memory to service hardware/software
interrupts, providing background operation. It remains in
memory and may provide services on behalf of other DOS
programs.
Terminal Emulation
A “terminal emulation” emulates a character-based
mainframe session on a remote non-mainframe terminal,
including all display features, commands and function keys.
The MC9000 Series supports Terminal Emulations in 3270,
5250 and VT220.
TFTP
(Trivial File Transfer Protocol) A version of the TCP/IP FTP
(File Transfer Protocol) protocol that has no directory or
password capability. It is the protocol used for upgrading
firmware, downloading software and remote booting of
diskless devices.
Tolerance
Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol See TCP/IP.
®
GL-18 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
See TFTP.
TSR
UPC
See Terminate and Stay Resident.
Universal Product Code. A relatively complex numeric
symbology. Each character consists of two bars and two
spaces, each of which is any of four widths. The standard
symbology for retail food packages in the United States.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A protocol within the IP protocol
suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery is
not required. For example, UDP is used for real-time audio
and video traffic where lost packets are simply ignored,
because there is no time to retransmit. If UDP is used and a
reliable delivery is required, packet sequence checking and
error notification must be written into the applications.
Visible Laser Diode (VLD)
WAN
A solid state device which produces visible laser light.
Wide-Area Network. A radio network that supports data
communication beyond a local area. That is, information
can be sent across a city, state, or even nationwide.
Warm Boot
A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all
running programs. All data that is not saved to flash
memory is lost.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy, is specified by IEEE for encryption
and decryption of RF (wireless) communications.
WEP Encryption
(Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption) The conversion of
data into a secret code for transmission over a public
network. The original text, or plaintext, is converted into a
coded equivalent called ciphertext via an encryption
algorithm. The ciphertext is decoded (decrypted) at the
receiving end and turned back into plaintext. The encryption
algorithm uses a key, which is a binary number that is
typically from 40 to 128 bits in length. The greater the
number of bits in the key (cipher strength), the more
possible key combinations and the longer it would take to
break the code. The data is encrypted, or “locked,” by
combining the bits in the key mathematically with the data
bits. At the receiving end, the key is used to “unlock” the
code and restore the original data.
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
See LAN.
See WAN.
Glossary GL-19
WNMP
(Wireless Network Management Protocol) This is Symbol’s
proprietary MAC layer protocol used for inter access point
communication and other MAC layer communication.
®
®
WNMS (was renamed to AirBEAM Manager) See AirBEAM Manager.
®
GL-20 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Index
Numerics
A
®
IN-2 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
UBC
aiming options
AirBEAM
AirBEAM configuration
B
bar codes
battery
boot
buttons
applications
Index IN-3
companion programs
C
charging
conventions
cradles
communication setup
D
data capture
imager operational modes
communication software
®
IN-4 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
demo program
E
e-mail connection
Ethernet communication
Excel
F
Index IN-5
internet
G
H
K
keypads
I
icons
imagersample
screens
L
laser scanning
M
®
IN-6 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
O
mobile computer
MobileDox
P
partitions
pin-outs
Pocket Internet Explorer
profile
N
Index IN-7
programs
S
scanner
scanning
screen
scripts
SDK
setting
Q
R
Reader
reset
setting up a partnership
®
IN-8 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
sound
Start menu
T
TCM
spare batteries
U
Index IN-9
Word
V
W
wakeup mobile computer
®
IN-10 MC9000-G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
Tell Us What You Think...
We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this
questionnaire and fax this form to: (631) 738-3318, or mail to:
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza M/S B-4
Holtsville, NY 11742-1300
Attention: Technical Publications Manager
IMPORTANT: If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support
number provided. Unfortunately, we cannot provide customer support at the fax number
above.
Manual Title:___________________________________________
(please include revision level)
How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?
Very familiar
Slightly familiar
Not at all familiar
Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable?
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
What can we do to further improve our manuals?
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Thank you for your input—We value your comments.
Symbol Technologies, Inc.
One Symbol Plaza
Holtsville, New York 11742-1300
http://www.symbol.com
72-65703-01
Revision A - October 2003
|
Samsung Am18b1 B2 B09 User Manual
Samsung Clx 6250fx User Manual
Sharp Af 08erl User Manual
Sharper Image Si857 User Manual
Siemens Automobile Parts S120 User Manual
Silicon Laboratories Toolstick Ek User Manual
Trane Air Conditioner 049e User Manual
Trion M3000 User Manual
Xerox Workcentre Pro 35 User Manual
York Sunline 2000 D2cg 072 User Manual